WO2020192654A1 - Radio link control (rlc) bearer configuration method and apparatus - Google Patents

Radio link control (rlc) bearer configuration method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020192654A1
WO2020192654A1 PCT/CN2020/080884 CN2020080884W WO2020192654A1 WO 2020192654 A1 WO2020192654 A1 WO 2020192654A1 CN 2020080884 W CN2020080884 W CN 2020080884W WO 2020192654 A1 WO2020192654 A1 WO 2020192654A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
node
rlc bearer
rlc
bearer
configuration
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/080884
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
朱元萍
戴明增
曹振臻
刘菁
卓义斌
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2020192654A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020192654A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/0252Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control per individual bearer or channel
    • H04W28/0263Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control per individual bearer or channel involving mapping traffic to individual bearers or channels, e.g. traffic flow template [TFT]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/06Optimizing the usage of the radio link, e.g. header compression, information sizing, discarding information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/11Allocation or use of connection identifiers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/20Manipulation of established connections
    • H04W76/27Transitions between radio resource control [RRC] states
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00Network topologies
    • H04W84/02Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]

Definitions

  • This application relates to access to an integrated backhaul IAB network, and in particular to a method and device for configuring a radio link control RLC bearer in an IAB network.
  • IAB Integrated access and backhaul
  • the present application provides a method and device for configuring an RLC bearer, which can improve the reliability of data transmission on the backhaul link of an IAB network.
  • this application provides a method for configuring an RLC bearer, which may be executed by the first node or a chip in the first node.
  • the method includes: a first node receives a first configuration message from a donor centralized unit CU, the first configuration message is used to instruct to configure a first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the first node and the second node, and the first node An RLC bearer pair is used to transmit the data packet of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device.
  • the first radio bearer has the function of copying and transmitting the data packet.
  • the first RLC bearer pair includes a first RLC bearer and a second RLC bearer ,
  • the first node is the parent node of the second node; the first node configures the first RLC bearer pair according to the first configuration message.
  • the first configuration message includes the first configuration content carried by the first RLC and the second configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the first configuration message
  • the configuration content and the second configuration content satisfy any one of the following ways: the first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the second configuration content includes The identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer; or, the first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the first identity, and the second configuration content includes all The identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, where the first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the first identifier is an identifier of the first radio bearer.
  • the first configuration message includes quality of service QoS information and first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the first node to configure according to the QoS information
  • the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer form the first RLC bearer pair.
  • this further includes: the first node sends a first response message to the host CU, the first response message carries an identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer And/or the second RLC bears the identifier of the corresponding logical channel.
  • the first response message also carries information about the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and/or the second RLC bearer corresponds to each Serving cell information available for the logical channel.
  • the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer are different; or,
  • the lists of available serving cells for the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer are different, and the serving cells in the lists of different serving cells have no intersection; or,
  • the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer have different cell groups of available serving cells for corresponding logical channels, and there is no intersection between the serving cells in the different cell groups.
  • the first response message further carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer is the RLC bearer of the main path.
  • this further includes: the first node receiving the data packet of the first radio bearer that the second node sends only on the first RLC bearer.
  • the first node is an intermediate backhaul node
  • the method further includes: the first node receives a first notification message from the host CU, where the first notification message is used for Indicate the activation of the restriction on the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the restriction on the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, or the first notification message is used to instruct to cancel the
  • the first RLC bearer has a restriction on the available serving cell of the logical channel and the second RLC bearer has a restriction on the available serving cell of the logical channel.
  • the method further includes: the first node receives a second notification message from the home CU, the second notification message is used to instruct to enable the logic corresponding to the first RLC bearer The restriction on the serving cell available for the channel and the restriction on the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, or the second notification message is used to instruct to cancel the restriction on the available serving cell for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer Restriction of available serving cells for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer;
  • the first node sends a third notification message to the second node, where the third notification message is used to indicate to the second node to enable the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and
  • the second RLC bearer corresponds to the restriction on the serving cell available for the logical channel, or the third notification message is used to instruct to cancel the restriction on the available serving cell for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC It bears the limitation of the available serving cell of the corresponding logical channel.
  • the method further includes: The data packets of the first radio bearer received on the channel are respectively mapped to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
  • the first node is the host distributed unit DU, which further includes: the first node associates two different general packet radio service tunnel protocols corresponding to the first radio bearer The data packets received on the GTP tunnel are respectively mapped to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
  • this application provides a method for configuring an RLC bearer, which may be executed by the second node or a chip in the second node.
  • the method includes: a second node receives a second configuration message from a donor centralized unit CU, the second configuration message is used to instruct to configure a first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the second node and the first node, and the second node
  • An RLC bearer pair is used to transmit the data packet of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device.
  • the first radio bearer has the function of copying and transmitting the data packet.
  • the first RLC bearer pair includes a first RLC bearer and a second RLC bearer ,
  • the second node is a child node of the first node; the second node configures the first RLC bearer pair according to the second configuration message.
  • the second configuration message includes the third configuration content carried by the first RLC and the fourth configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the third configuration message
  • the configuration content and the fourth configuration content satisfy any one of the following methods: the third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the fourth configuration content includes The identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer; or, the third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the first identity, and the fourth configuration content includes all The identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, where the first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the first identifier is an identifier of the first radio bearer.
  • the second configuration message further carries third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer is an RLC bearer of the main path.
  • this further includes: the second node receives from the donor CU the logical channel used to instruct to cancel the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer, respectively In the case of the first notification message of the limitation of available serving cells, the second node only transmits data packets to the first node through the first RLC bearer; or, the second node receives the first radio from a logical channel When carrying data packets, the second node only transmits the data packets to the first node through the first RLC bearer; or, the second node determines that the data volume of the data packets of the first radio bearer does not exceed a preset threshold Within a limited time, the second node only transmits data packets to the first node through the first RLC bearer.
  • this further includes: the second node receives a first notification message from the donor CU, where the first notification message is used to instruct to enable the corresponding first RLC bearer
  • this further includes: the second node receives a third notification message from the first node, where the third notification message is used to instruct to enable the first RLC bearer corresponding The limit of the available serving cell of the logical channel and the limit of the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, or the third notification message is used to instruct to cancel the availability of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer The limitation of the serving cell and the limitation of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
  • the second node is an access backhaul node serving the first terminal device, and before the second node receives the first notification message from the host CU, the method The method further includes: the second node determines the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer, the activation state includes activation and deactivation; the second node instructs the host CU to copy the data packet of the first radio bearer The activation status of the transmission function.
  • the method further includes: The data packets of the first radio bearer received on the channel are respectively mapped to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
  • this application provides a method for configuring the RLC bearer, which can be executed by the CU or the chip in the CU.
  • the method includes: a donor centralized unit CU generates a first configuration message, the first configuration message is used to instruct to configure a first radio link control RLC bearer pair between a first node and a second node, and the first RLC bearer pair It is used to transmit the data packet of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device.
  • the first radio bearer has the function of copying and transmitting the data packet.
  • the first RLC bearer pair includes the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
  • the first node Is the parent node of the second node; the host CU sends the first configuration message to the first node.
  • the first configuration message includes the first configuration content carried by the first RLC and the second configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the first configuration message
  • the configuration content and the second configuration content satisfy any one of the following ways: the first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the second configuration content includes The identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer; or, the first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the first identity, and the second configuration content includes all The identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, where the first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the first identifier is an identifier of the first radio bearer.
  • the first configuration message includes quality of service QoS information and first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the first node to configure according to the QoS information
  • the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer form the first RLC bearer pair.
  • this further includes: the host CU receives a first response message from the first node, the first response message carries an identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer And/or the second RLC bears the identifier of the corresponding logical channel.
  • the first response message further carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer is the RLC bearer of the main path.
  • the method further includes: the host CU generates a second configuration message, where the second configuration message is used to instruct to configure the first node between the second node and the first node.
  • a radio link control RLC bearer pair the donor CU sends a second configuration message to the second node.
  • the second configuration message includes the third configuration content carried by the first RLC and the fourth configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the third configuration message
  • the configuration content and the fourth configuration content satisfy any one of the following methods: the third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the fourth configuration content includes The identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer; or, the third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the first identity, and the fourth configuration content includes all The identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, where the first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the first identifier is an identifier of the first radio bearer.
  • the second configuration message further carries third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer is the RLC bearer of the primary path.
  • the method further includes: the host CU sends a first notification message to the first node and the second node, and the A notification message is used to indicate to enable the restriction of the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the restriction of the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, or the first notification message is used For instructing to cancel the restriction on the serving cell that is available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the restriction on the available serving cell for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
  • the method before the host CU sends the first notification message, the method further includes: the host CU determines the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer , The activation state includes activation and deactivation; or, the host CU receives from the access backhaul node serving the first terminal device information indicating the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer, The activation state includes activation and deactivation.
  • the present application provides a device for transmitting data packets.
  • the device has the function of implementing the method in the first aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof.
  • the function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
  • this application provides a device for transmitting data packets, the device having the function of implementing the method in the second aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof.
  • the function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
  • this application provides a device for transmitting data packets.
  • the device has the function of implementing the method in the third aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof.
  • the function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
  • this application provides a network device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the network device executes the foregoing first aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • this application provides a network device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the network device executes the foregoing second aspect or any possible implementation method of the second aspect.
  • this application provides a network device including a processor and a memory.
  • the memory is used to store a computer program
  • the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the network device executes the foregoing third aspect or any possible implementation method of the third aspect.
  • this application provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is used to read and execute a computer program stored in the memory to execute the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or wire, and the memory is used to store a computer program.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface.
  • this application provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is used to read and execute the computer program stored in the memory to execute the second aspect or any possible implementation method of the second aspect.
  • the chip further includes a memory, the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire, and the memory is used for storing computer programs.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface.
  • this application provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is used to read and execute a computer program stored in the memory to execute the third aspect or any possible implementation method of the third aspect.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or wire, and the memory is used to store a computer program.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface.
  • this application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer can execute the first aspect or any one of its possibilities The method in the implementation.
  • this application also provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes computer program code.
  • the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or any one of its possibilities. The method in the implementation.
  • this application also provides a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes computer program code.
  • the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer can execute the third aspect or any one of its possibilities. The method in the implementation.
  • this application also provides a computer storage medium that stores computer instructions in the computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the first aspect or any of its possible implementations. Method in.
  • the present application also provides a computer storage medium that stores computer instructions in the computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the second aspect or any of its possible implementations. Method in.
  • this application also provides a computer storage medium in which computer instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the third aspect or any possible implementation manner thereof Method in.
  • the technical solution of the present application by configuring an RLC bearer pair between the parent node and the child node of the backhaul link, can support the mapping of the data packets of the radio bearer configured with the data packet replication transmission function of the terminal device to the RLC bearer respectively Transmission is carried out on the two included RLC bearers, so that the data packet of one radio bearer can be transmitted on the backhaul link to the next hop through different RLC bearers, which improves the reliability of data packet transmission on the backhaul link .
  • Figure 1 is an architecture diagram of an IAB system suitable for the technical solution of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of the composition of an IAB node.
  • Figure 3 (a) and (b) are examples of the protocol stack architecture of the intermediate IAB node.
  • Figure 4 is an example of the user plane protocol stack architecture of a multi-hop IAB network.
  • Figure 5 is an example of the control plane protocol stack architecture of a multi-hop IAB network.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram of the mapping relationship among RLC channels, logical channels, and protocol entities.
  • Figure 7 is a specific example of the IAB system.
  • Figure 8 (a) and (b) are sending scenarios where the UE supports the copy operation of the data packet.
  • Fig. 9 is an example of a scenario where a UE is supported to perform a data packet copy operation in an IAB network.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting data packets provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 500 for configuring an RLC bearer provided by this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 600 for configuring an RLC bearer provided by this application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 700 for configuring an RLC bearer provided by this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the network device 1000 provided by the present application.
  • the communication systems mentioned in the embodiments of this application include but are not limited to: narrowband-internet of things (NB-IoT) system, wireless local access network (WLAN) system, LTE system, next-generation 5G mobile Communication systems or communication systems after 5G, such as NR, device-to-device (D2D) communication systems, etc.
  • NB-IoT narrowband-internet of things
  • WLAN wireless local access network
  • LTE long-generation 5G mobile Communication systems or communication systems after 5G, such as NR, device-to-device (D2D) communication systems, etc.
  • the base stations mentioned in this application include but are not limited to: evolved node B (evolved node base, eNB), radio network controller (RNC), node B (node B, NB), base station controller (base station) controller, BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (home evolved NodeB, or home node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), evolved (evolved LTE, eLTE) base station, NR base station (next generation node B, gNB), etc.
  • eNB evolved node B
  • RNC radio network controller
  • node B node B
  • base station controller base station controller
  • BSC base transceiver station
  • home base station home evolved NodeB, or home node B, HNB
  • BBU baseband unit
  • evolved LTE evolved LTE
  • eLTE eLTE
  • Terminal equipment includes but is not limited to: user equipment (UE), mobile station, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent, Station (ST), cell phone, cordless phone, session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station in wireless local area network (wireless local access network, WLAN) Personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld devices with wireless communication functions, computing devices, other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, mobile stations in the future 5G network, and public Any of the terminal devices in the public land mobile network (PLMN) network.
  • UE user equipment
  • PLMN public land mobile network
  • the wireless backhaul node (may also be referred to as an IAB node) is used to provide a wireless backhaul service for a node (for example, a terminal) that wirelessly accesses the wireless backhaul node.
  • the wireless backhaul service refers to the data and/or signaling backhaul service provided through the wireless backhaul link.
  • the IAB node is a specific name of a relay node, which does not limit the solution of the present application. It may be one of the aforementioned base stations or terminal devices with a forwarding function, or may be an independent device form.
  • the IAB nodes can provide wireless access services for terminals, and are connected to a donor base station (donor gNB) through a wireless backhaul link to transmit user service data.
  • donor gNB donor base station
  • the IAB node may also be equipment such as customer premises equipment (CPE for short) and residential gateway (RG for short).
  • CPE customer premises equipment
  • RG residential gateway
  • the method provided in the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to a home access scenario.
  • an IAB system includes at least one base station 100, and one or more terminal devices (terminal) 101 served by the base station 100, one or more relay nodes (that is, IAB nodes) 110, and IAB One or more terminal devices 111 served by the node 110.
  • the IAB node 110 is connected to the base station 100 through a wireless backhaul link 113.
  • the base station 100 is called a donor base station.
  • the donor base station is also referred to as a donor node or a donor node or an IAB donor (IAB donor) in this application.
  • the IAB system may also include one or more intermediate IAB nodes. For example, IAB node 120 and IAB node 130.
  • the donor base station can be an access network element with complete base station functions, or it can be a form in which a centralized unit (centralized unit, referred to as CU) and a distributed unit (abbreviated as DU) are separated, that is, the host node is controlled by the donor base station.
  • the centralized unit and the distributed unit of the donor base station In this article, the centralized unit of the host node is also called IAB donor CU (also called donor CU, or directly called CU).
  • the distributed unit of the host node is also called IAB donor DU (or donor DU).
  • the donor CU may also be a form where the control plane (CP) (referred to as CU-CP in this article) and the user plane (UP) (referred to in this article as CU-UP) are separated.
  • CP control plane
  • UP user plane
  • a CU may be composed of one CU-CP and one or more CU-UPs.
  • the host node is composed of Donor-CU and Donor-DU as an example to illustrate the method provided in the embodiments of the present application.
  • Link Refers to the path between two adjacent nodes in a path.
  • Access link the link between the terminal device and the base station, or between the terminal device and the IAB node, or between the terminal device and the host node, or between the terminal device and the host DU.
  • the access link includes a wireless link used when a certain IAB node is in the role of a common terminal device to communicate with its parent node. When the IAB node acts as an ordinary terminal device, it does not provide backhaul services for any child nodes.
  • the access link includes an uplink access link and a downlink access link.
  • the access link of the terminal device is a wireless link, so the access link may also be called a wireless access link.
  • Backhaul link the link between the IAB node and the parent node when it is used as a wireless backhaul node.
  • the backhaul link includes an uplink backhaul link and a downlink backhaul link.
  • the backhaul link between the IAB node and the parent node is a wireless link, so the backhaul link can also be called a wireless backhaul link.
  • Each IAB node regards the neighboring node that provides wireless access service and/or wireless backhaul service for it as a parent node.
  • each IAB node can be regarded as a child node of its parent node.
  • the child node may also be called a lower-level node, and the parent node may also be called an upper-level node.
  • the last hop node of a node refers to the last node in the path containing the node that received the data packet before the node. It can be understood that the previous hop node of a node may include the previous hop node of the node in uplink transmission and the previous hop node of the node in downlink transmission.
  • the next hop node of a node refers to the node in the path containing the node that receives the data packet first after the node. It can be understood that the next hop node of a node may include the next hop node of the node in uplink transmission and the next hop node of the node in downlink transmission.
  • the entry link of a node refers to the link between the node and the previous hop node of the node, and can also be called the previous hop link of the node. It can be understood that the ingress link of the node may include the ingress link of the node in uplink transmission and the ingress link of the node in downlink transmission.
  • the exit link of a node refers to the link between the node and the next hop node of the node, and can also be called the next hop link of the node. It can be understood that the egress link of the node may include the egress link of the node in uplink transmission and the egress link of the node in downlink transmission.
  • Access IAB node refers to the IAB node that the terminal accesses, or the IAB node that provides access services for the terminal device.
  • Intermediate IAB node refers to an IAB node that provides wireless backhaul services for other IAB nodes (for example, access IAB nodes or other intermediate IAB nodes).
  • the IAB node may have a mobile terminal (MT) part and a DU part.
  • the IAB node uses the MT part to communicate with its parent node, and the IAB node uses the DU part to communicate with its child nodes (the child node may be a terminal or another IAB node).
  • An IAB node can establish a backhaul connection with at least one parent node of the IAB node through the MT part.
  • the DU part of an IAB node can provide access services for the terminal or the MT part of other IAB nodes. The following is an example description with reference to Figure 2.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the composition of an IAB node.
  • the UE is connected to the host node through IAB node 2 and IAB node 1.
  • IAB node 1 and IAB node 2 both include a DU part and an MT part.
  • the DU part of IAB node 2 provides access services for the UE.
  • the DU part of IAB node 1 provides access services for the MT part of IAB node 2.
  • the DU part of the host node provides access services for the MT part of the IAB node 1.
  • the protocol stack of the IAB network includes the user plane protocol stack and the control plane protocol stack.
  • the intermediate IAB node has the same protocol stack on the user plane and the control plane.
  • Figure 3 (a) and (b) are examples of the protocol stack architecture of the intermediate IAB node.
  • the MT part and the DU part of the intermediate IAB node may not share an adaptation (adapt) layer, as shown in Figure 3(a).
  • the MT part and the DU part of the intermediate IAB node can also share the adaptation layer, as shown in Figure 3(b).
  • the protocol stacks for accessing the IAB node are different in the user plane and the control plane. Refer to the IAB node 1 shown in Figure 4 and Figure 5 respectively.
  • FIG. 4 is an example of a user plane protocol stack architecture of a multi-hop IAB network.
  • PDCP Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • GTP-U General Packet Radio Service Tunneling Protocol user plane
  • UDP user datagram protocol
  • IP internet protocol
  • L2 layer layer 2
  • L1 layer layer 1
  • Radio link control RLC
  • MAC medium access control
  • PHY physical
  • RRC radio resource control
  • F1 application protocol F1application protocol, F1AP
  • SCTP stream control transmission protocol
  • the L2 layer is the link layer.
  • the L2 layer may be the data link layer in the open systems interconnection (OSI) reference model.
  • the L1 layer can be a physical layer.
  • the L1 layer may be the physical layer in the OSI reference model.
  • radio bearers In order to meet the service quality requirements of different types of services of terminal equipment, one or more radio bearers (RB) are introduced into the wireless network.
  • the radio bearers include data radio bearer (DRB) and signaling radio bearer (signaling).
  • raido bearer, SRB used to transmit different types of service data (including control plane signaling and user plane data) between the UE and the base station.
  • the RB can be considered as a logical channel for data transmission between the UE and the host node.
  • each protocol layer will be configured with a corresponding protocol layer entity, such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, and a MAC entity.
  • a protocol layer entity such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, and a MAC entity.
  • the data packets of the UE (such as IP data packets) are processed in the PDCP layer, and then passed through the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the PHY layer to the access backhaul node (such as the IAB node shown in Figure 4). 2) The PHY layer.
  • an IAB node can include a DU part and an MT part.
  • the MT part of the IAB node performs data forwarding on the backhaul link without the complete protocol stack of the terminal device on the wireless access link.
  • the IAB node 2 shown in FIG. 4 is for the IAB node 1, and the IAB node 2 is a child node of the IAB node 1.
  • the IAB node 2 sends the data packet from the UE to the IAB node 1
  • the MT of the IAB node 2 does not need the PDCP layer, and the data packet is forwarded under the adaptation layer (adapt layer). Therefore, in Figure 4, when an IAB node acts as a wireless backhaul node to send a data packet to its parent node, only the protocol layer below the adaptation layer is involved, which is applicable to all IAB nodes and will not be repeated.
  • the protocol stack of the communication link between it and the parent node is the same as the protocol stack of the wireless access link between the UE and the access IAB node.
  • the protocol stack is the same as the protocol stack between the UE and the host CU.
  • FIG. 4 also shows the user plane protocol stack of the F1 interface between the host CU and the access IAB node (IAB node 2 in FIG. 4).
  • the GTP-U tunnel established by the F1 interface through the GTP-U protocol layer corresponds to the data radio bearer DRB of the UE.
  • each radio bearer of a UE has a GTP tunnel corresponding to one of them.
  • FIG. 5 is an example of a control plane protocol stack architecture of a multi-hop IAB network.
  • the introduction of each protocol layer in Figure 4 is also applicable to Figure 5, but there are some differences.
  • the F1 interface between the access IAB node and the host CU uses the F1 control plane (F1-C) protocol stack.
  • F1-C F1 control plane
  • FIGS. 4 and 5 respectively show an example of an end-to-end user plane and control plane protocol stack architecture for transmitting the data service of the UE in the IAB network.
  • the protocol stack architecture may also have other possibilities. For example, if the F1 interface between IAB2 and the host CU introduces a protocol layer for security protection, the protocol stack architecture will change.
  • the IAB donor reserves the protocol stacks for the external node interfaces of donor DU and donor CU, and the protocol layer on the internal interface between donor DU and donor CU is not necessary. Similarly, the protocol stack of the IAB node does not distinguish between the DU part and the MT part to the outside, and only displays the protocol stack to the external node interface uniformly.
  • Donor-DU when Donor-DU is the proxy node of the F1 interface between Donor-CU and IAB nodes, Donor-DU faces users who access the IAB node
  • the surface protocol stack architecture above the IP layer, it can include the UDP layer and the GTP-U layer, which are equivalent to the UDP layer and GTP-U layer in the protocol stack architecture of the DU part of the IAB node.
  • the SCTP layer and the F1AP layer in the protocol stack architecture are equivalent to the SCTP layer and the SCTP layer, respectively, and may also include an IPsec layer or DTLS layer that is equivalent to the DU part of the IAB node;
  • Figures 4 and 5 also involve the F1 interface.
  • the F1 interface refers to the logical interface between the DU part of the IAB node and the host node (or donor-CU or donor-DU).
  • the F1 interface can also be referred to as an F1* interface, which supports the user plane and the control plane.
  • the protocol layer of the F1 interface refers to the communication protocol layer on the F1 interface.
  • the user plane protocol layer of the F1 interface may include one or more of the IP layer, the UDP layer, and the GTP-U layer.
  • the user plane protocol layer of the F1 interface further includes a PDCP layer and/or an IP security (IP Security, IPsec) layer.
  • IP Security IP Security, IPsec
  • control plane protocol layer of the F1 interface may include one or more of the IP layer, the F1AP layer, and the SCTP layer.
  • control plane protocol layer of the F1 interface further includes one or more of the PDCP layer, the IPsec layer, and the datagram transport layer security (DTLS) layer.
  • DTLS datagram transport layer security
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the mapping relationship between RLC channels, logical channels, and protocol entities.
  • the RLC channel (RLC channel) is the channel between the RLC layer and the upper protocol layer.
  • the configuration of the radio bearer corresponds to the configuration of the upper layer (for example, the PDCP layer) part and the lower layer (for example, the RLC layer and the MAC layer) part.
  • the configuration of the RLC bearer refers to the configuration of the RB at the RLC layer, which specifically includes the configuration of the RLC layer entity and logical channel.
  • the RLC bearer of the IAB node on the backhaul link includes the RLC layer and the logical channel part.
  • the RLC channel on the backhaul link is the channel between the RLC layer and the upper protocol layer. For example, if the upper layer of the RLC layer is the PDCP layer, the RLC channel on the backhaul link is the channel between the RLC layer and the PDCP layer.
  • the RLC channel on the backhaul link is a channel between the RLC layer and the adaptation layer. Therefore, the definition of the RLC channel depends on the upper protocol layer of the RLC layer.
  • the RLC channel of the IAB node on the backhaul link corresponds to one RLC entity one by one, and also corresponds to one RLC bearer.
  • the adapt entity and the RLC entity can be one adapt entity corresponding to multiple RLC entities, as shown in Figure 6(a), or one adapt entity corresponding to one RLC entity, as shown in Figure 6(b) , This application does not limit this.
  • the adaptation layer has one or more of the following capabilities: adding routing information (routing information) that can be recognized by the wireless backhaul node (IAB node) to the data packet, and based on the above can be recognized by the wireless backhaul node Perform routing selection on the outgoing routing information, add identification information related to the quality of service (QoS) requirements that can be identified by the wireless backhaul node for the data packet, and execute the data packet on the multi-segment chain containing the wireless backhaul node QoS mapping on the road, adding data packet type indication information to data packets, and sending flow control feedback information to nodes with flow control capabilities.
  • routing information routing information
  • IAB node wireless backhaul node
  • QoS quality of service
  • the routing information that can be recognized by the wireless backhaul node may be the identification of the terminal, the identification of the IAB node that the terminal accesses, the identification of the host node, the identification of Donor-DU, the identification of Donor-CU, the identification of the transmission path One or more of the information such as identification.
  • the QoS mapping on the multi-segment link may be: in the wireless backhaul link, based on the identification of the RB of the terminal carried in the data packet, execute the RLC bearer or RLC channel or logic from the RB of the terminal to the wireless backhaul link.
  • Channel mapping or, based on the correspondence between any two or more of the ingress link and egress link RB, RLC bearer, RLC channel, and logical channel, perform the RB or RLC bearer from the ingress link Or RLC channel or logical channel, RB or RLC bearer or RLC channel or logical channel mapping to egress link.
  • the identification information related to the QoS requirements may be, for example, the QoS flow identifier (QFI) of the terminal, the RB identifier of the terminal, the differentiated services code point (DSCP), Internet Protocol version 6 One or more of the flow label in the header of the IP data packet (internet protocol version 6, referred to as IPv6).
  • QFI QoS flow identifier
  • DSCP differentiated services code point
  • IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6
  • IPv6 Internet Protocol version 6
  • protocol layer with these capabilities is not necessarily the adaptation layer, but may also be other names. Those skilled in the art can understand that any protocol layer with these capabilities can be understood as the adaptation layer in the embodiment of the application.
  • this application also involves routing and bearer mapping.
  • Route selection used to select the next hop node for the data packet.
  • Bearer mapping can also be called QoS mapping.
  • the bearer mapping is used to select the RLC bearer or RLC channel or logical channel for sending data packets.
  • an IAB node is connected to an upper-level node.
  • an IAB node such as 120
  • the IAB node 130 in Figure 1 also It may be connected to the IAB node 120 through the backhaul link 134, that is, both the IAB node 110 and the IAB node 120 are regarded as the upper node of the IAB node 130.
  • the names of the IAB nodes 110, 120, and 130 do not limit the scenarios or networks where they are deployed, and may be any other names such as relay, RN, and so on.
  • an IAB node can generally refer to any node or device with a relay function.
  • the use of IAB node and relay node in this application should be understood to have the same meaning, and the use of IAB node in this application is only for convenience of description. .
  • the wireless links 102, 112, 122, 132, 113, 123, 133, 134 can be bidirectional links, including uplink and downlink transmission links.
  • the wireless backhaul links 113, 123, 133, 134 can be used by the upper node to provide services for the lower node, such as the upper node 100 is the lower node 110 provides wireless backhaul services.
  • the uplink and downlink of the backhaul link may be separated, that is, the uplink and the downlink are not transmitted through the same node.
  • the downlink transmission refers to an upper node, such as node 100, and a lower node, such as node 110, transmitting information or data
  • the uplink transmission refers to a lower node, such as node 110, and an upper node, such as node 100, transmitting information or data.
  • the node is not limited to whether it is a network node or a terminal device.
  • the terminal device can act as a relay node to serve other terminal devices.
  • the wireless backhaul link can also be an access link in some scenarios.
  • the backhaul link 123 can also be regarded as an access link for the node 110, and the node 100 As an ordinary terminal device, the backhaul link 113 is also the access link of the node 100.
  • the above-mentioned upper node may be a base station or a relay node
  • the lower node may be a relay node or a terminal device with a relay function.
  • the lower node may also be a terminal device.
  • the IAB node can be made to support dual connectivity (DC) or multi-connectivity to deal with possible abnormal situations in the backhaul link. For example, abnormalities such as link interruption or blockage and load fluctuations can improve the reliability of transmission. Therefore, the IAB network supports multi-hop networking and can also support multi-connection networking.
  • DC dual connectivity
  • multi-connectivity to deal with possible abnormal situations in the backhaul link. For example, abnormalities such as link interruption or blockage and load fluctuations can improve the reliability of transmission. Therefore, the IAB network supports multi-hop networking and can also support multi-connection networking.
  • a transmission path composed of multiple links between the UE served by the IAB node and the IAB donor.
  • a transmission path includes multiple nodes, for example, UE, one or more IAB nodes, and IAB donor (if the IAB donor is in the form of separate CU and DU, it also includes the Donor DU part and the Donor CU part).
  • the parent node of IAB node 1 is IAB donor
  • IAB node 1 is the parent node of IAB node 2 and IAB node 3
  • IAB node 2 and IAB node 3 are both the parent nodes of IAB node 4
  • IAB node 5 The parent node of is IAB node 3.
  • the uplink data packet of the UE may be transmitted to the host site IAB donor via one or more IAB nodes, and then sent by the IAB donor to the mobile gateway device (for example, the user plane function unit UPF in the 5G core network).
  • the mobile gateway device for example, the user plane function unit UPF in the 5G core network.
  • the UE's downlink data packet will be received by the IAB donor from the mobile gateway device, and then sent to the UE through the IAB node.
  • the IAB donor there are two available paths for data transmission between UE1 and the donor base station. Path 1: Terminal 1 ⁇ IAB node 4 ⁇ IAB node 3 ⁇ IAB node 1 ⁇ host node, and terminal 1 ⁇ IAB node 4 ⁇ IAB node 2 ⁇ IAB node 1 ⁇ host node.
  • terminal 2 and host node There are three available paths for data packet transmission between terminal 2 and host node, namely: terminal 2 ⁇ IAB node 4 ⁇ IAB node 3 ⁇ IAB node 1 ⁇ host node, terminal 2 ⁇ IAB node 4 ⁇ IAB node 2 ⁇ IAB Node 1 ⁇ host node, and terminal 2 ⁇ IAB node 5 ⁇ IAB node 2 ⁇ IAB node 1 ⁇ host node.
  • IAB networking scenario shown in Figure 7 is only exemplary.
  • IAB scenario where multi-hop and multi-connection are combined there are more other possibilities, for example, the IAB donor in Figure 7 and another IAB nodes under the IAB donor form dual connections to serve the UE, etc., which are not listed here.
  • data packet duplication (duplication) operations can be performed. That is, the data packet to be transmitted is copied on the sending side to obtain two identical data packets. Then, the two identical data packets are sent to the receiving side via two transmission paths. Description will be given below in conjunction with FIG. 3.
  • Fig. 8 (a) and (b) are sending scenarios in which the UE supports the copy operation of the data packet.
  • Figure 8 (a) is a carrier aggregation (CA) scenario.
  • the base station and the UE can map the data packet to two different component carriers (CC) for transmission, so as to support the data packet copy operation.
  • Figure 8(b) is a dual connectivity (DC) scenario.
  • Data packets on the sending side can reach the receiving side through two different paths.
  • one path is a direct link between the UE and the master base station, and the cell group serving the UE on this path is the master cell group (MCG).
  • MCG master cell group
  • the other path is composed of two links of UE-secondary base station-primary base station.
  • the cell group served by the secondary base station for the UE is a secondary cell group (SCG).
  • SCG secondary cell group
  • FIG. 9 is an example of a scenario in which a UE is supported to perform a data packet copy operation in an IAB network.
  • the UE can perform a CA-based packet copy operation on the access link.
  • CA is also supported between IAB1 and IAB2. Therefore, between IAB2 and IAB1, a CA-based manner can be used to support the UE to perform data packet copy operations.
  • the IAB node of the backhaul link can also support the transmission of the duplication data packet of the UE in a DC-based manner on the backhaul link, for example, FIG. 9(b).
  • IAB 2 has two parent nodes IAB 1 and IAB 3, and IAB 2 can transmit the duplication data packet of the UE through two links between the two parent nodes.
  • the UE is supported to perform a data packet duplication operation. It can also be said that the transmission of duplication data packets of the UE is supported.
  • the duplication data packet of the UE described in the embodiment of the present application refers to a data packet in which the UE has performed a duplication operation.
  • the duplication data packet of the UE includes the data packet subjected to the duplication operation and its duplicated data packet, or the data packet subjected to the duplication operation and its copy.
  • the access link of the UE may support multiple connections, so that the UE can support duplication of data packets in a DC manner.
  • the data packets that have performed the copy operation can be transmitted through different backhaul links, can also be transmitted on a public backhaul link that supports CA, or may be transmitted on a public backhaul link that does not support CA.
  • the following description takes the CU-DU separation architecture of the donor base station as an example.
  • the host CU further has a CP and UP separation architecture
  • the host CU can be replaced with CU-CP.
  • the donor base station is a complete functional entity and does not separate the CU and DU
  • the donor CU and/or the donor DU in the embodiment can be replaced with the donor base station for understanding, and the donor CU does not need to configure the donor DU the process of.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for configuring an RLC bearer provided by the present application.
  • the host node described in FIG. 10 may be the host node 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first node may be the node 110 shown in FIG. 1, and the second node may be the node 120 or the node 130 shown in FIG.
  • the host CU sends a first configuration message to the first node, and the first node receives the first configuration message from the host CU.
  • the first configuration message is used to instruct the first node to configure the first RLC bearer pair between the first node and the second node.
  • the first RLC bearer pair may be used to transmit data packets of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device.
  • the first radio bearer is configured with data packet replication transmission.
  • the first node is the host DU or an intermediate IAB node.
  • the first node is the parent node of the second node. That is, the second node is a child node of the first node.
  • the first RLC bearer pair refers to a group of RLC bearers formed by two RLC bearers between the first node and the second node.
  • the first RLC bearer pair is used to transmit the data packet of the first radio bearer.
  • the first radio bearer supports the duplication and transmission of the data packet.
  • the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair are used to transmit data packets from the first radio bearer. Radio bearer data packets and their duplicate data packets (or, called duplicates).
  • the first radio bearer supports the replication transmission of data packets, which can be understood as the first radio bearer is configured with data packet replication transmission (function or capability), or the first radio bearer has data packet replication transmission (function or Capability), or the first radio bearer has the capability of copying and transmitting data packets.
  • the copy transmission operation can be activated or deactivated. When the copy transmission operation is in the activation state, each data on the first radio bearer The package will be copied into two (or more) for transmission.
  • One of the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair may be used to transmit a data packet, and the other RLC bearer may be used to transmit a duplicate data packet of this data packet.
  • the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair are used to transmit two identical data packets on the first radio bearer.
  • the data packet on the first radio bearer is not copied into two (or more) copies for transmission, and only one data packet of the first radio bearer is still transmitted.
  • the first RLC One RLC bearer in the bearer pair can transmit the data packet on the first radio bearer.
  • the wireless backhaul node or its MT part can be regarded as a terminal device. Therefore, if the wireless backhaul node transmits itself via the first node The wireless backhaul node can also be regarded as the first terminal device.
  • the first radio bearer supports or is configured with a data packet copy transmission function, which means that the first radio bearer has such a function.
  • the data packet copy transmission function of the first radio bearer can be activated or deactivated.
  • each RLC bearer uniquely corresponds to one RLC channel, and also uniquely corresponds to a logical channel.
  • an RLC bearer pair may also be expressed as an RLC channel pair or a logical channel pair, which is not limited in this application.
  • the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair may only use one of the RLC bearers for data transmission. These cases will be described in detail below.
  • the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair are respectively denoted as the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
  • the donor CU may instruct the first node to configure the first RLC bearer pair in the following manner.
  • the first configuration content and the second configuration content in the first configuration message are used to indicate the first RLC bearer, and the second configuration content is used to configure the second RLC bearer.
  • the first configuration content and the second configuration content satisfy any one of the following modes:
  • the first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer
  • the second configuration content includes the identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer
  • the first configuration content and the second configuration content both include the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, indicating that the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer form an RLC bearer pair.
  • the first configuration content includes the identifier and the first identifier of the first RLC bearer
  • the second configuration content includes the identifier and the first identifier of the second RLC bearer.
  • the first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form a first RLC bearer pair.
  • the first configuration content and the second configuration content each include a common first identifier in addition to an RLC bearer identifier, which means that the first configuration content and the second configuration content are combined through the first identifier.
  • the RLC bearers contained in are associated to form an RLC bearer pair.
  • the first identifier may be the identifier of the first radio bearer (or bearer identifier).
  • the donor CU can conveniently indicate to the first node the two bearers forming the RLC bearer pair, saving signaling overhead.
  • the first configuration message may not include the RLC bearer identifier, and the donor CU instructs the first node to configure the first RLC bearer pair in other ways, as described in (3) below.
  • the first configuration message contains quality of service QoS information and first indication information.
  • the first indication information is used to instruct the first node to configure the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer according to the QoS information to form a first RLC bearer pair .
  • the first configuration message includes QoS information and first indication information.
  • the first indication information the first node configures two RLC bearers that meet the QoS indicated by the QoS information, thereby forming a first RLC bearer pair.
  • the donor CU may not indicate the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the first node can flexibly configure the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer according to the QoS information.
  • the first configuration message includes reliability parameters.
  • the donor CU instructs the first node to configure the first RLC bearer pair through an implicit indication.
  • the first node compares the reliability parameter contained in the first configuration message with the pre-configured threshold, and if the comparison result between the reliability parameter index contained in the first configuration message and the pre-configured threshold meets the need to configure two RLC bearers If conditions are met, two RLC bearers are configured to form an RLC bearer pair.
  • the reliability parameter is the packet loss rate, and when it is less than the preset threshold, it indicates that the reliability requirement is high and two RLC bearers need to be configured.
  • the reliability parameter is a reliability indicator, and when it is greater than the preset threshold, it indicates that the reliability requirement is high, and two RLC bearers need to be configured.
  • the reliability parameters are not limited here.
  • Various parameters that can characterize the reliability of data transmission, such as error rate, packet loss rate, etc., are all applicable in this application.
  • the first node can flexibly configure the first RLC bearer and/or the second RLC bearer according to the pre-configured threshold.
  • the first configuration message may also carry a backhaul type indication.
  • the indication of the backhaul type is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer and/or the second RLC bearer is used to transmit the backhaul service.
  • the backhaul service refers to the service (including data and signaling) of the terminal transmitted via the wireless backhaul link between the first node and its child node (second node), which is different from the first node.
  • Access service of two nodes The access service of the second node refers to the own service (including data and signaling) transmitted from or ending at the second node (or the MT part of the second node) when the second node is regarded as a terminal role.
  • the protocol stack of the backhaul link can be used for communication between the first node and the second node.
  • the first node and the second node can use The protocol stack of the access link communicates.
  • the first configuration message may be a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) message or an F1 interface application layer protocol (F1 application protocol, F1AP) message.
  • RRC radio resource control
  • F1 application protocol F1AP
  • the first configuration message may also include one or more of some information: the bearer that can be mapped to the first RLC bearer to the UE's radio bearer for transmission
  • the identifier can be mapped to the QoS label in the data packet transmitted by the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the bearer identifier of the UE's radio bearer can be composed of UE ID + radio bearer (radio bearer, RB) identifier (identifier, ID), or GTP-U TEID + IP address, or other
  • UE ID + radio bearer radio bearer, RB
  • identifier ID
  • GTP-U TEID + IP address or other
  • TEID represents the tunnel endpoint identifier (tunnel endpoint identifier).
  • the RB here may be a signaling radio bearer (signaling radio bearer, SRB) or a data radio bearer (data radio bearer, DRB).
  • SRB signaling radio bearer
  • DRB data radio bearer
  • the QoS label can refer to the differentiated services code point (DSCP) value in the IP header, the flow label in IPv6, the quality of service class identifier (QoS class identifier, QCI), and the 5G QoS identifier (5G QoS identifier). , 5QI), etc.
  • DSCP differentiated services code point
  • QCI quality of service class identifier
  • 5G QoS identifier 5G QoS identifier
  • the first node configures the first RLC bearer pair between the first node and the second node according to the first configuration message, which is used to transmit the same data packet of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device (or the first radio bearer Data package and its copy).
  • the first node and/or the second node need to perform routing selection to determine the next hop node, and need to perform bearer mapping to determine the RLC bearer used to transmit the data packet .
  • the configuration of the first node and/or the second node for routing and the configuration of bearer mapping will be introduced below.
  • the first node configures the first RLC bearer pair according to the first configuration message. After completing the configuration, the first node returns a first response message to the host CU.
  • the first node sends a first response message to the host CU.
  • the host CU receives the first response message from the first node.
  • the first response message carries the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and/or the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
  • the first response message carries the identifiers of the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer, which can be used when the donor CU configures bearer mapping.
  • the host CU can use the identifier of the logical channel to perform bearer mapping.
  • the first configuration message may also carry information of the allowed serving cells (allowed serving cells) available for the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
  • the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer is different from the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, which can improve the reliability of the transmission of the same data packet transmitted from the first radio bearer . .
  • the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer serve two different cells.
  • the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer respectively serve two different cell lists, wherein the cells contained in the different cell lists have no intersection.
  • the available serving cells for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer are the same.
  • the first node may also carry second indication information in the first response message, where the second indication information is used to indicate the RLC bearer or logical channel used as a primary path in the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the RLC bearer as the primary path refers to one of the first RLC bearer or the second RLC bearer included in the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the logical channel as the primary path refers to a logical channel corresponding to one of the first RLC bearer or the second RLC bearer included in the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the first response message may also include the RLC bearer pair generated by the first node for the second node (that is, the child node of the first node) for the RLC bearer pair between the second node configuration and the first node.
  • the RLC bearer pair generated by the first node for the second node (that is, the child node of the first node) for the RLC bearer pair between the second node configuration and the first node.
  • the information element used to configure the RLC bearer pair may be RLC-BearerConfig
  • the first response message may carry the RLC-BearerConfig information element or the content in the RLC-BearerConfig
  • the second node may follow the RLC-BearerConfig
  • the content configures the RLC layer and logical channels.
  • the first response message may be an RRC message or an F1AP message.
  • the host CU instructs a parent node to perform the configuration of the RLC bearer pair between its child nodes, and then the host CU may instruct the child node to perform the configuration corresponding to the RLC bearer between its parent nodes.
  • the host CU sends a second configuration message to the second node.
  • the second node receives the second configuration message from the host CU.
  • the second node is an IAB node, which may be an access IAB node or an intermediate IAB node.
  • the second configuration message also contains configuration content instructing the second node to configure the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the first RLC bearer pair may be used to transmit data packets of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device.
  • the second configuration message contains third configuration content and fourth configuration content, where the third configuration content is used to configure the first RLC bearer in the first RLC bearer pair, and the fourth configuration content is used to Configure the second RLC bearer in the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the third configuration content includes the logical channel identifier (LCID) of the logical channel (logical channel, LCH) corresponding to the first RLC bearer, and the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer Information, and the configuration content of the RLC entity and logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer.
  • LCID logical channel identifier
  • LCH logical channel identifier
  • the fourth configuration content includes the logical channel identifier (LCID) of the logical channel (logical channel, LCH) corresponding to the second RLC bearer, and the available serving cell of the second RLC bearer corresponding logical channel Information, and the configuration content of the RLC entity and logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
  • LCID logical channel identifier
  • the third configuration content and the fourth configuration content also satisfy any of the following modes.
  • the third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer
  • the fourth configuration content includes the identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer
  • the third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the first identity
  • the fourth configuration content includes the identity of the second RLC bearer and the first identity.
  • the first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form a first RLC bearer pair.
  • the second configuration message includes reliability parameters.
  • the description of the third configuration content and the fourth configuration content in the manners (1)-(3) can refer to the description of the first configuration content and the second configuration content in step 210, and will not be repeated.
  • the second configuration message carries the first identifier.
  • the first identifier may be a bearer identifier of the first radio bearer.
  • the second configuration message carries third indication information
  • the third indication information is used to indicate the RLC bearer serving as the primary path in the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the third indication information is carried in the third configuration content.
  • the first response message returned by the first node to the donor CU may carry second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the RLC bearer of the first RLC bearer pair as the primary path.
  • the host CU may indicate the main path specified in the first response message to the child node of the first node (that is, the second node).
  • the second node may also transmit the data packet of the first radio bearer to its parent node only through the RLC bearer in the first RLC bearer pair as the main path in some cases.
  • the second node may send the data packet to the first node only through the main path in the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the preset threshold may be configured by the host CU, for example, included in the second configuration message and sent to the second node.
  • the second node may only send the first node to the first node through the main path of the first RLC bearer pair.
  • a data packet carried by a radio may only send the first node to the first node through the main path of the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the second node if the second node does not need to map the UE's data packet to two RLC bearers for transmission, the second node only sends the data packet to the first node through the primary path in the first RLC bearer .
  • the second configuration message includes the information of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
  • the information of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer may be carried in the third configuration content
  • the information of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer may be carried in the fourth configuration content.
  • the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logical channels corresponding to the second RLC bearer have different available serving cells.
  • the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer serve different cells or serve different cell lists, or the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer belong to different cell groups, corresponding to For different cell group identification.
  • the cells included in the different cell lists or cell groups have no intersection.
  • the second configuration message may also carry other information.
  • the second configuration message may also include a threshold value for the amount of data, and the threshold value is used for the offload decision of the second node for uplink transmission.
  • the threshold value is used for the offload decision of the second node for uplink transmission.
  • some uplink data packets can be mapped to one of the RLC bearers in the first RLC pair for transmission, and the second node can use the threshold value in which the data volume of these uplink data packets does not exceed the threshold value.
  • only the RLC bearer specified by the third indication information as the primary path is used to transmit the uplink data packets; otherwise, these uplink data packets may be transmitted through the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the second configuration message may also carry one or more of the following information: indication of the backhaul type, the identifier of the RLC bearer of the backhaul link, and the information element used to configure the RLC layer (for example, RLC-Config), cells used to configure logical channels (for example, LogicalChannelConfig), etc.
  • the indication of the backhaul type is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer and/or the second RLC bearer is used to transmit the backhaul service.
  • the backhaul service refers to the service (including data and signaling) of the terminal transmitted via the wireless backhaul link between the second node and the parent node of the second node, which is different from the second node Access business.
  • the access service of the second node refers to the own service (including data and signaling) transmitted from or ending at the second node (or the MT part of the second node) when the second node is regarded as a terminal role.
  • the second node and the parent node can use the protocol stack of the backhaul link for communication.
  • the second node and the parent node can use access The protocol stack of the link communicates.
  • the second configuration message may also include one or more of the following information: the bearer that can be mapped to the first RLC bearer to the UE's radio bearer for transmission Identifier, the identifier of the RLC bearer that can be mapped to the last hop link transmitted on the first RLC bearer during uplink transmission, and the RLC that can be mapped to the last hop link transmitted on the second RLC bearer during uplink transmission.
  • the identity of the bearer, the identity of the next hop link RLC bearer to which the data packet transmitted on the first RLC bearer can be mapped during the downlink transmission, and the identity of the data packet transmitted on the second RLC bearer during the downlink transmission can be mapped to The identifier of the RLC bearer on the next hop link.
  • the second configuration message may also include one or more of the following information: the radio bearer that can be mapped to the first RLC bearer to the UE transmitting Bearer identification, QoS label that can be mapped to the data packet transmitted by the first RLC bearer pair, QoS label that can be mapped to the data packet transmitted by the second RLC bearer, and GTP TEID that can be mapped to the first RLC bearer transmission Or GTP TEID+IP address, which can be mapped to GTP TEID or GTP TEID+IP address transmitted by the second RLC bearer.
  • the bearer identity of the radio bearer of the UE may be composed of UE identity + RB ID, or GTP-U TEID + IP address, or other forms, and the radio bearer RB may be SRB or DRB.
  • the QoS label can refer to the DSCP value in the IP header, flow label, QCI, 5QI, etc. in IPv6.
  • the second node After the second node completes the configuration of the first RLC bearer pair with the first node according to the second configuration message, it sends a second response message to the first donor CU.
  • the second node sends a second response message to the host CU.
  • the host CU receives the second response message from the second node.
  • the second response message may be used to feed back to the host CU the configuration of the first RLC bearer pair between the second node and the parent node.
  • the second response message may be an RRC message or an F1AP message.
  • the above takes the configuration of the RLC bearer pair between two IAB nodes as an example to describe the configuration process of the RLC bearer pair in detail. It is understandable that in the multi-hop scenario in the IAB network, for each IAB node on the backhaul link that supports the wireless bearer transmission of the terminal device, it is necessary to configure the RLC bearer pair with the parent node, and also need Configure the RLC bearer pair with the child node.
  • an IAB node faces the parent node it can be regarded as a child node of the parent node.
  • the process of configuring the RLC bearer pair between the IAB node and its parent node can refer to the configuration behavior of the second node.
  • the IAB node faces a child node it can be regarded as the parent node of the child node.
  • the process of configuring the RLC bearer pair between the IAB node and its child nodes can refer to the configuration behavior of the first node.
  • the backhaul link can support the duplication operation of the data packet of the radio bearer of the UE, which improves the reliability of the data transmission of the backhaul link.
  • the RLC bearer pair configuration on the backhaul link may also be updated according to the actual data transmission situation.
  • the following describes the process of updating the configuration of the RLC bearer pair of the backhaul link.
  • the first radio bearer of the first terminal device is taken as an example. If the data packet copy transmission function of the first terminal device of the first terminal device is deactivated, the backhaul link between the first terminal device and the host node The restriction on the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers in the configured RLC bearer pair can be cancelled. If the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer of the terminal device is activated, the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers in the RLC bearer pair configured on the backhaul link between the first terminal device and the host node The limitation of available serving cells can be enabled. Therefore, the active status of the data packet replication transmission function of the radio bearer of the UE needs to be known by the host DU and/or the IAB node on the backhaul link.
  • the logical channel can use any cell in the cell group corresponding to the logical channel.
  • logical channel 1 is allocated by the first node to the second node, and the cell group served by the first node for the second node is called cell group 1.
  • Cell group 1 includes cell 1, cell 2, and cell 3.
  • Cell 4 when configuring logical channel 1 of the second node, the available serving cells of logical channel 1 include cell 1 and cell 2, then when the restriction on the available serving cells of logical channel 1 is cancelled, logical channel 1 can Use any cell in the cell group 1, that is, any one of cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, and cell 4.
  • the data packet of the first radio bearer of the terminal device may be transmitted only through the RLC bearer of the RLC bearer pair as the main path.
  • the replication operation of the first radio bearer of the terminal device is activated, or the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers in the RLC bearer pair configured on the backhaul link is activated, the backhaul On the link, the data packet of the first radio bearer of the terminal device needs to be transmitted through the two RLC bearers in the RLC bearer pair.
  • the activation state includes two states: activation and deactivation.
  • This application provides the following implementation methods for the configuration of the RLC bearer pair updating the backhaul link.
  • the second node In the second configuration message sent by the donor CU to the second node, if the RLC bearer pair on the wireless backhaul link between the second node and the first node is included, the available serving cell of each RLC bearer corresponding to the logical channel , The second node defaults that the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers in the RLC bearer pair is enabled.
  • the second node may be an access IAB node or an intermediate IAB node
  • the first node is a parent node of the second node.
  • the host CU determines the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device.
  • the host CU indicates the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer in the configuration information of the first radio bearer sent to the first terminal device.
  • the host CU sends a first notification message to the second node, and the first notification message is specifically used to instruct the second node to enable the second node
  • the RLC bearer on the backhaul link between the first node and the first node limits the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two included RLC bearers.
  • the second node may be an access IAB node or an intermediate IAB node
  • the first node is a parent node of the second node.
  • the active state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer is deactivated, the host CU sends a first notification message to the second node, and the first notification message is specifically used to instruct the second node
  • the restriction of the RLC bearer on the backhaul link between the second node and the first node on the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two contained RLC bearers is cancelled.
  • the first notification message may be an RRC message or an F1AP message, which is not limited here.
  • the host CU sends a second notification message to the first node.
  • the second notification message is used to indicate that the activation state of the packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer is activated.
  • the first After the node obtains the second notification message, it sends a third notification message to its child node (ie, the second node).
  • the third notification message is used to instruct the second node to enable the backhaul chain between the second node and the first node.
  • the RLC bearer on the road restricts the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers; or, the donor CU sends a second notification message to the first node, and the second notification message is used to indicate the status of the first radio bearer
  • the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function is deactivated.
  • the first node obtains the second notification message, it sends a third notification message to its child node (ie, the second node).
  • the third notification message is used to The second node instructs to cancel the restriction of the RLC bearer on the backhaul link between the second node and the first node on the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two contained RLC bearers.
  • the second notification message may be an RRC message or an F1AP message, which is not limited here.
  • the third notification message may be included in a control element (CE) of a media access control (MAC) layer and sent to the second node.
  • CE control element
  • MAC media access control
  • the access IAB node serving the first terminal device determines the activation status of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device, and informs the host CU, and the host CU sends a first notification message to the second node, Or the host CU sends the second notification message to the first node, and the first node may send the third notification message to the second node.
  • the donor CU sends the first notification message to the second node, the donor CU sends the second notification message to the first node, and the first node sends the third notification message to the second node, please refer to the configuration of updating the RLC bearer pair of the backhaul link. Understand the description in Mode 1.
  • the configuration of the RLC bearer pair of the backhaul link can be flexibly opened or cancelled.
  • the second configuration message may carry a third indication message, and the third indication information is used to indicate the RLC bearer in the first RLC bearer pair as the primary path.
  • the second node obtains the third indication information, if the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer is deactivated, the second node only transmits the first radio bearer to the first node through the main path specified by the third indication information Packets.
  • the second node receives from the donor CU, it is specifically used to instruct the cancellation of the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer’s respective corresponding logical channel available serving cell
  • the second node receives from the first node a third notification message specifically used to instruct to cancel the restriction of the serving cells available for the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer,
  • the second node only transmits the data packet of the first radio bearer through the RLC bearer designated as the primary path.
  • the information indicating the configuration of the bearer mapping can be carried in the first configuration message in step 210 and sent to the first node, or carried in the second configuration message in step 230 and sent to the second node, or it can be It is sent separately to the first node and/or the second node, which is not limited in this application.
  • This application provides a variety of bearer mapping methods, and the following uses the first radio bearer of the first terminal device as an example for description.
  • method 1 is applicable to all IAB nodes (that is, access IAB nodes and intermediate IAB nodes) and the host DU.
  • method 2 is applicable to access IAB nodes and host DU.
  • the RLC bearer of the ingress link is mapped to the RLC bearer of the egress link.
  • method 3 is applicable to all IAB nodes.
  • the GTP-U TEID or GTP-U TEID+IP address carried in the data packet is mapped to the RLC bearer of the egress link.
  • method 4 is applicable to access IAB nodes and host DU.
  • the duplication data of the UE needs to be mapped to two different RLC bearers for transmission.
  • the access IAB node will be from two Two different logical channels (denoted as LCH1, LCH2, respectively) receive the UE's RB1 data packet, and access to the IAB node needs to map the data packet received from LCH1, LCH2 to the RLC bearer of two different egress links Upward transmission to the parent node.
  • the access IAB node maps the data packets of RB1 received from LCH1 and LCH2 to the RLC bearer of egress link 1 and the RLC bearer of egress link 2 for transmission.
  • the access IAB node When accessing the IAB node for uplink bearer mapping configuration, if the UE’s radio bearer supports the replication transmission of data packets and the replication transmission function is activated, the access IAB node receives from two different logical channels The data packets of the radio bearer of the UE will be respectively mapped to the RLC bearers of two different egress links and transmitted to the parent node.
  • access to the IAB node also needs to configure the cells served by the RLC bearer of the two different egress links.
  • the RLC bearers of the two different egress links serve different cells or different cell lists or different cell groups.
  • mapping modes for accessing the IAB node
  • the configuration of these mapping modes may be sent by the host CU to the accessing IAB node, or may be determined by the accessing IAB node.
  • the access IAB node assigns the RLC bearer or logical channel data of two different ingress links corresponding to the same radio bearer of a certain UE to be mapped to the RLC bearer of two different egress links. transmission.
  • an access IAB node will correspond to two different GTP-U tunnels (identified by the GTP-U tunnel endpoint identifier TEID or GTP-U TEID+IP address) on the same radio bearer of a certain UE. Designate RLC bearers mapped to two different egress links for transmission.
  • the two different GTP-U tunnels may be identified by different GTP-U TEID or GTP-U TEID+IP address.
  • the access IAB node adds data packets of two different logical channels corresponding to the same radio bearer of a certain UE with different QoS labels, and then carries the data packets of the two different QoS labels Specify the RLC bearer mapped to two different egresses for transmission.
  • the different QoS labels may be DSCP values, or flow label values, etc., which are not limited here.
  • the configuration of the bearer mapping of the backhaul link involves uplink transmission and downlink transmission.
  • the intermediate IAB node may also have multiple bearer mapping modes, and the configuration of these bearer mapping modes may be sent by the host CU to the intermediate IAB node, or may be determined by the intermediate IAB node itself.
  • the radio bearer of the UE that is configured to support the data packet replication transmission function (for example, CA-based data packet replication) and the data packet replication transmission function is activated (for example, marked as RB1 ), the data packets corresponding to the radio bearer RB1 of the UE received from two different RLC bearers or logical channels are respectively mapped to the RLC bearers of two different egress links for transmission to the next hop.
  • the data packet replication transmission function for example, CA-based data packet replication
  • the data packet replication transmission function for example, marked as RB1
  • the data packets corresponding to the radio bearer RB1 of the UE received from two different RLC bearers or logical channels are respectively mapped to the RLC bearers of two different egress links for transmission to the next hop.
  • the radio bearer of the UE that is configured to support the data packet replication transmission function (for example, CA-based data packet replication) and the data packet replication transmission function is activated (for example, marked as RB1 ), the data packet corresponding to the radio bearer RB1 of the UE received from the RLC bearer or logical channel of two different ingress links is mapped to the RLC bearer of two different egress links for next hop transmission.
  • the data packet replication transmission function for example, CA-based data packet replication
  • the data packet replication transmission function for example, marked as RB1
  • the logical channels corresponding to the RLC bearers of the two different egress links are restricted to serve cells.
  • the logical channels corresponding to the RLC bearers of two different egress links serve different cells or different cell lists or different cell groups.
  • the RLC bearer of egress link 1 corresponds to logical channel 1, and the RLC bearer pair of egress link 2 is used for logical channel 2.
  • logical channel 1 is restricted to serve cell 1
  • logical channel 2 is restricted to serve cell 2.
  • logical channel 1 is restricted to serve cells in cell list 1
  • logical channel 2 is restricted to serve cells in cell list 2.
  • the cells in the cell list 1 and the cells in the cell list 2 have no intersection.
  • logical channel 1 is restricted to serve the cells included in cell group 1
  • logical channel 2 is restricted to serve cells included in cell group 2.
  • the cells included in the cell group 1 and the cells included in the cell group 2 have no intersection.
  • the configuration of the bearer mapping of the backhaul link only involves downlink transmission.
  • the radio bearer When the donor DU configures the downlink bearer mapping, for the radio bearer of the UE that supports data packet replication transmission and the data packet replication transmission function is in the active state, the radio bearer is received from the RLC bearer or logical channel of two different ingress links. The data packet and its copy corresponding to the bearer are respectively mapped to the RLC bearer or logical channel of two different egress links for transmission to the next hop node.
  • the logical channels corresponding to the RLC bearers of the two different egress links may be restricted to serve cells.
  • logical channels corresponding to RLC bearers of different egress links serve different cells or different cell lists or different cell groups.
  • the cell lists contained in different cell lists have no intersection, and the cells contained in different cell groups have no intersection.
  • the cell where the logical channel is restricted to serve and the serving cell where the logical channel is available can be replaced with each other.
  • the donor DU may also have multiple specific mapping methods.
  • the configuration of the bearer mapping mode for downlink transmission may be sent by the host CU to the host DU, or may be determined by the host DU itself.
  • the donor DU assigns two different GTP-U tunnels corresponding to the same radio bearer of a certain UE, and respectively designates RLC bearers mapped to two different egress links.
  • the host CU adds different QoS labels to data packets of two different logical channels corresponding to the same radio bearer of a certain UE, and then assigns the two different QoS labels to the two different host DUs.
  • RLC bearer of the egress link RLC bearer of the egress link.
  • the two different GTP-U tunnels may be identified by different GTP-U TEID or GTP-U TEID+IP address.
  • the way that the IAB node and the host DU perform bearer mapping on the backhaul link can make the UE's replicated data packet be transmitted through different paths on the backhaul link, so that the backhaul link of the IAB network is also the UE's data Transmission provides a guarantee of higher reliability.
  • the following describes the configuration process for the IAB node to perform routing.
  • the following uses the first node as an example for description.
  • the routing configuration in the embodiments of the present application may be an uplink routing configuration for uplink transmission, or a downlink routing configuration for downlink transmission.
  • the first node receives third configuration information from the host CU.
  • the third configuration information is used to configure the routing configuration of the adaptation layer entity of the first node.
  • the third configuration information includes the following content: a routing identifier, corresponding to the routing identifier Next hop node ID.
  • the route identifier may be the target node identifier or the transmission path identifier.
  • the first node may be an access IAB node, or an intermediate IAB node, or a host DU.
  • next hop node identifier may include only one node identifier, or multiple node identifiers.
  • next-hop node identifiers When there are multiple next-hop node identifiers corresponding to one routing identifier, it indicates that for a data packet carrying a routing identifier, the first node can forward the data packet through multiple different next-hop nodes.
  • the third configuration information may also include a main path indication, the main path indication corresponding to the identifier of the first next hop node corresponding to the multiple next hop node identifiers, and is used to indicate that the first next hop node is the main path.
  • the first node performs route selection, for the data packet carrying the first route identifier, select the first next hop node as the next hop node, and send the data carrying the first route identifier to the first next hop node package.
  • the third configuration information may also include a primary path indication and a threshold (threshold, TH).
  • the primary path indication corresponds to the identifier of the first next hop node among the multiple next hop node identifiers, and is used to indicate that the first next hop node is the primary path.
  • the first node selects the first next hop node as the next hop node, and sends it to the first next hop node Sending a data packet carrying the first route identifier;
  • the first node can identify from multiple next-hop nodes Among the corresponding multiple next hop nodes, one next hop node is arbitrarily selected, and a data packet carrying the first route identifier is sent to it.
  • an RLC bearer pair can be configured for the duplication data packet of the UE on the backhaul link, or multiple RLC bearers can be configured to transmit the duplication data packet of the UE. Therefore, the duplication data packet of the UE can be transmitted on the IAB network.
  • the transmission link provides higher reliability guarantee for UE data transmission.
  • the host CU will indicate to the access IAB node of the UE.
  • the radio bearer of the UE can be divided into signaling radio bearer SRB and data radio bearer DRB, which will be described separately below.
  • the configuration message sent to the access IAB node by the host CU includes the configuration content for the SRB that carries duplication transmission indication information (or called duplication indication information).
  • the host CU may carry the replication transmission instruction information in the F1AP message sent by the F1AP protocol layer.
  • the F1AP message may be a context establishment request of the UE or a context modification request of the UE.
  • the configuration content of the host CU for a certain SRB does not contain replication transmission indication information, it indicates that the SRB does not support replication transmission.
  • the configuration message sent to the access IAB node by the host CU includes the information of two uplink GTP-U tunnel endpoints in the configuration content for the DRB.
  • the information of the uplink GTP-U tunnel endpoint may be, for example, an IP address+GTP-U TEID.
  • the configuration message sent by the host CU to the access IAB node carries the information of the two uplink GTP-U tunnel endpoints, which means that the DRB data packet needs to pass through the two different GTP-U tunnels in the host CU and Transmission between access IAB nodes.
  • the access IAB node needs to map the same data packet of the DRB to the RLC bearer of different egress links and send it to the next hop node.
  • the configuration content for a certain DRB received by the access IAB received from the host CU only contains information about one uplink GTP-U tunnel endpoint, it means that the DRB does not support the replication and transmission of data packets. At this time, the access IAB node does not perform special processing on the DRB data packet.
  • an IAB node does not perform special processing on a data packet of a radio bearer, which means that the data packet of the radio bearer does not need to be mapped to RLC bearers of different egress links.
  • the access IAB node will be the RB x in the access Configure two RLC bearers on the incoming link, that is, configure one RLC bearer pair.
  • the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers are configured with available cells or cell lists.
  • the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers serve different cells or cell lists.
  • the IAB node After the IAB node completes the configuration of the two RLC bearers of the access link, it sends the configuration information of the two RLC bearers to the donor CU, and then the donor CU sends the configuration information to the UE so that the UE can access the link
  • the RLC bearer used to transmit the duplication data packet of the RB x (that is, the data packet and its copy, which may also be called the duplication data packet) is configured.
  • the duplication transmission function of the radio bearer of the UE may be activated or deactivated.
  • the duplication data packet of the radio bearer is transmitted through only one RLC bearer on the access link.
  • this RLC bearer used to transmit duplication data packets may be considered as the primary path.
  • the duplication data packet of the radio bearer will pass through two RLC bearers configured on the access link (that is, one RLC bearer) on the access link. Bearer pair) for transmission.
  • the PDCP layer configuration related to the radio bearer RB x of the UE needs to include the cell group ID and the logical channel identifier corresponding to the primary path
  • the logical channel included in the configuration information of the RLC bearer sent by the donor CU to the UE The identity is allocated by the access IAB node. Therefore, the access IAB node will send the logical channel identifier (LCID) corresponding to the primary path to the host CU, so that the host CU can send it to the UE.
  • LCID logical channel identifier
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 500 for transmitting data packets provided by this application.
  • the device 500 includes a transceiver unit 510 and a processing unit 520.
  • the transceiver unit 510 is configured to receive a first configuration message from the donor centralized unit CU, where the first configuration message is used to instruct to configure a first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the apparatus and the second node, and the first RLC bearer
  • the first radio bearer is configured with the function of copying and transmitting the data packet, and the first RLC bearer pair includes the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. Is the parent node of the second node;
  • the processing unit 520 is configured to configure the first RLC bearer pair according to the first configuration message.
  • the transceiver unit 510 is further configured to send a first response message to the donor CU, where the first response message carries the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and/or the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer .
  • the transceiving unit 510 is further configured to receive the data packet of the first radio bearer sent by the second node only on the RLC bearer serving as the primary path in the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the transceiving unit 510 is further configured to receive a first notification message from the donor CU, where the first notification message is used to indicate the restriction of the available serving cell for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logic corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
  • the restriction on the serving cell available for the channel, or the first notification message is used to instruct the cancellation of the restriction on the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer limits.
  • the processing unit 520 is further configured to map the data packets of the first radio bearer received from two different logical channels to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer, respectively.
  • the processing unit 520 is further configured to map data packets received on two different General Packet Radio Service Tunneling Protocol GTP tunnels corresponding to the first radio bearer to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC respectively. Bearing on.
  • the device 500 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.
  • the transceiver unit 510 may be a communication interface, for example, an input/output interface, an input interface circuit, an output interface circuit, and so on.
  • the processing unit 520 may be a processor.
  • the apparatus 500 may completely correspond to the first node in the method embodiment of the present application.
  • the units included in the apparatus 500 are respectively used to implement corresponding operations and/or processing performed by the first node in each method embodiment.
  • the transceiver unit 510 may be a transceiver, which includes a transmitter and a receiver, and has both receiving and sending functions.
  • the processing unit 520 may be a processor.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 600 for transmitting data packets provided by this application.
  • the device 600 includes a transceiver unit 610 and a processing unit 620.
  • the transceiver unit 610 is configured to receive a second configuration message from the donor centralized unit CU, where the second configuration message is used to instruct to configure the first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the device and the first node, the first RLC bearer For the data packet used to transmit the first radio bearer of the first terminal device, the first radio bearer is configured with the function of copying and transmitting the data packet, and the first RLC bearer pair includes the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. Is a child node of the first node;
  • the processing unit 620 is configured to configure the first RLC bearer pair according to the second configuration message.
  • the transceiver unit 610 is further configured to receive, from the donor CU, a first notification message for instructing to cancel the restriction on the serving cells available for the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. , And, the transceiver unit 610 transmits data packets to the first node only through the RLC bearer in the first RLC bearer pair as the primary path.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to receive the data packet of the first radio bearer from a logical channel, and the transceiving unit 610 only transmits the RLC bearer as the primary path in the first RLC bearer pair to the The first node transmits the data packet.
  • the processing unit 620 is further configured to determine that the number of data packets of the first radio bearer does not exceed a preset threshold, and the transceiving unit 610 only uses the RLC bearer of the first RLC bearer pair as the primary path. Transmitting a data packet to the first node.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to receive a first notification message from the donor CU, where the first notification message is used to indicate to enable the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer Restrictions on the serving cells available for the respective corresponding logical channels, or the first notification message is used to instruct the cancellation of the restriction on the serving cells available for the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the respective logical channels corresponding to the second RLC bearer Limits of available serving cells.
  • the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to receive a second notification message from the first node, where the second notification message is used to instruct to enable or cancel the available logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. Restriction of serving cell.
  • the processing unit 620 is further configured to determine the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer, and the transceiver unit 610 is further configured to send a data packet indicating the first radio bearer to the host CU Copy the information of the activation status of the transfer function.
  • the processing unit 620 is further configured to map the received data packets of the first radio bearer on two different logical channels to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer, respectively.
  • the device 600 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.
  • the transceiver unit 610 may be a communication interface, for example, an input/output interface, an input interface circuit, an output interface circuit, and so on.
  • the processing unit 620 may be a processor.
  • the apparatus 600 may completely correspond to the second node in the method embodiment of the present application.
  • the units included in the apparatus 600 are respectively used to implement corresponding operations and/or processing performed by the second node in each method embodiment.
  • the transceiver unit 610 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver includes a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the processing unit 620 may be a processor.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a data packet transmission apparatus 700 provided by this application.
  • the device 700 includes a transceiver unit 710 and a processing unit 720.
  • the processing unit 710 is configured to generate a first configuration message, where the first configuration message is used to instruct to configure a first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the first node and the second node, and the first RLC bearer pair is used to transmit the first The data packet of the first radio bearer of the terminal device.
  • the first radio bearer is configured with the function of copying and transmitting the data packet.
  • the first RLC bearer pair includes the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
  • the first node is the parent of the second node. node;
  • the transceiver unit 720 is configured to send a first configuration message to the first node.
  • the transceiver unit 720 is further configured to receive a first response message from the first node, where the first response message carries the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and/or the logic corresponding to the second RLC bearer The ID of the channel.
  • processing unit 710 is further configured to generate a second configuration message
  • transceiver unit 720 is further configured to send a second configuration message to the second node.
  • processing unit 710 is further configured to generate third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the RLC bearer serving as the primary path in the first RLC bearer pair.
  • the transceiver unit 720 is further configured to send the first notification message to the first node and the second node.
  • the first notification message is used to indicate to enable the restriction of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the restriction of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, or the first notification message is used For instructing to cancel the restriction on the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the restriction on the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
  • the processing unit 710 is further configured to determine the activation state of the data packet copy transmission function of the first radio bearer before the transceiver unit 720 sends the first notification message, or the transceiver unit 720 serves the first notification message.
  • the access backhaul node of the terminal device receives information used to indicate the activation state of the data packet copy transmission function of the first radio bearer.
  • processing unit 710 is further configured to map data packets received on two different GTP tunnels corresponding to the first radio bearer to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
  • the device 600 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.
  • the processing unit 710 may be a processor.
  • the transceiver unit 720 may be a communication interface, for example, an input/output interface, an input interface circuit, an output interface circuit, and so on.
  • the apparatus 700 may completely correspond to the host node in the method embodiment of the present application.
  • the units included in the apparatus 700 are respectively used to implement corresponding operations and/or processing performed by the host node in each method embodiment.
  • the processing unit 710 may be a processor.
  • the transceiver unit 720 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver includes a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the chips described in the above device embodiments may be field-programmable gate arrays (FPGA), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), system on chips (SoC), and central Processor (central processor unit, CPU), network processor (Network Processor, NP), digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), can also be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit, MCU, programmable controller ( programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • FPGA field-programmable gate arrays
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • SoC system on chips
  • CPU central processor unit, CPU
  • Network Processor Network Processor
  • NP Network Processor
  • digital signal processing circuit digital signal processor, DSP
  • microcontroller unit microcontroller unit, MCU, programmable controller (programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
  • PLD programmable logic device
  • this application also provides a network device 1000, which is described below with reference to FIG. 14.
  • the network equipment 1000 includes an antenna 1101, a radio frequency device 1102, and a baseband device 1103.
  • the antenna 1101 is connected to the radio frequency device 1102.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 receives the signal sent by the previous hop network node through the antenna 1101, and sends the received signal to the baseband device 1103 for processing.
  • the baseband device 1103 processes the signal to be sent to the next-hop network node, and sends it to the radio frequency device 1102, and the radio frequency device 1102 sends the signal through the antenna 1101.
  • the baseband device 1103 may include one or more processing units 11031.
  • the baseband device 1103 may further include a storage unit 11032 and a communication interface 11033.
  • the storage unit 11032 is used to store computer programs and data.
  • the communication interface 11033 is used to exchange information with the radio frequency device 1102.
  • the communication interface 11033 may be an input/output interface or an input/output circuit.
  • the structure of the apparatus 500 may be a network device 1000 as shown in FIG. 12.
  • the transceiver unit 510 may be implemented by the radio frequency device 1102
  • the processing unit 520 may be implemented by the baseband device 1103.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 is configured to receive the first configuration message from the host CU through the antenna 1101, and send the first configuration message to the baseband device 1103 through the communication interface 11033.
  • the baseband device 1103 is configured to configure the first RLC bearer pair with the second node according to the first configuration message.
  • the baseband device 1103 is further configured to generate a first response message, and send the first response message to the radio frequency device 1102 through the communication interface 11033.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to send the first response message to the host CU through the antenna 1101.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to receive the first notification message through the antenna 1101.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 is also used to send a second notification message.
  • the baseband device 1103 is also used to perform bearer mapping, generate second indication information, and so on.
  • the structure of the apparatus 600 may also be a network device 1000 as shown in FIG. 12.
  • the transceiver unit 610 may be implemented by the radio frequency device 1102
  • the processing unit 620 may be implemented by the baseband device 1103.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 is configured to receive the second configuration message from the host CU through the antenna 1101, and send the second configuration message to the baseband device 1103 through the communication interface 11033.
  • the baseband device 1103 is configured to configure the first RLC bearer pair with the first node according to the second configuration message.
  • the baseband device 1103 is further configured to generate a second response message, and send the second response message to the radio frequency device 1102 through the communication interface 11033.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to send the second response message to the host CU through the antenna 1101.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to receive the first notification message through the antenna 1101.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to receive the second notification message.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to receive the second notification message through the antenna 1101.
  • the baseband device 1103 is also used to determine the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer.
  • the baseband device 1103 is further configured to map data packets on two different logical channels corresponding to the first radio bearer to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer of the first RLC bearer pair, respectively.
  • the structure of the apparatus 700 may be a network device 1000 as shown in FIG. 14.
  • the processing unit 710 may be implemented by the baseband device 1103, and the transceiver unit 720 may be implemented by the radio frequency device 1102.
  • the baseband device 1103 is used to generate the first configuration message, and the radio frequency device 1102 is used to receive the first response message through the antenna 1101.
  • the baseband device 1103 is also used to generate the first configuration content and the second configuration content in the first configuration message.
  • the baseband device 1103 is used to generate the second configuration message, and the radio frequency device 1102 is used to receive the second response message through the antenna 1101.
  • the baseband device 1103 is also used to generate the third configuration content and the fourth configuration content in the second configuration message.
  • the baseband device 1103 is further configured to generate first indication information and third indication information.
  • the baseband device 1103 is also used to determine the activation state of the data packet copy transmission function of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device.
  • the radio frequency device 1102 is also used to send the first notification message.
  • this application also provides a communication system, including one or more of the first node, the second node, and the host node as described in the method embodiment.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions.
  • the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer can execute the corresponding operations performed by the first node in any method embodiment and/ Or processing.
  • This application provides a computer-readable storage medium in which computer instructions are stored.
  • the computer instructions When the computer instructions are run on the computer, the computer is caused to execute the corresponding operations performed by the second node in any method embodiment and/ Or processing.
  • This application provides a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions.
  • the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer can execute the corresponding operations performed by the host node in any method embodiment and/or deal with.
  • the computer program product includes computer program code.
  • the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding operations and/or performed by the first node in any method embodiment of this application. deal with.
  • the computer program product includes computer program code.
  • the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding operations and/or performed by the second node in any method embodiment of this application. deal with.
  • the computer program product includes computer program code.
  • the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding operations and/or performed by the second node in any method embodiment of this application. deal with.
  • This application also provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is used to call and run a computer program stored in the memory to execute the corresponding operation and/or processing performed by the first node in any method embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is connected to the processor.
  • the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface.
  • the communication interface is used to receive signals and/or data to be processed, and the processor obtains the signals and/or data to be processed from the communication interface and processes them.
  • This application also provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is used to call and run a computer program stored in the memory to execute corresponding operations and/or processing performed by the second node in any method embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is connected to the processor.
  • the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface.
  • the communication interface is used to receive signals and/or data to be processed, and the processor obtains the signals and/or data to be processed from the communication interface and processes them.
  • This application also provides a chip including a processor.
  • the processor is used to call and run a computer program stored in the memory to execute corresponding operations and/or processing performed by the host node in any method embodiment of the present application.
  • the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is connected to the processor.
  • the processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
  • the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface.
  • the communication interface is used to receive signals and/or data to be processed, and the processor obtains the signals and/or data to be processed from the communication interface and processes them.
  • the aforementioned communication interface may be an input/output interface, which may specifically include an input interface and an output interface.
  • the communication interface may be an input/output circuit, which may specifically include an input interface circuit and an output interface circuit.
  • the memory and the memory involved in the foregoing embodiments may be physically independent units, or the memory may also be integrated with the processor.
  • the network device when the network device is the first node, the network device may implement the operations and/or processing performed by the first node in the above method embodiments by calling a program by the processing unit.
  • the processing unit 11031 calls a program stored by the storage unit 11032 to execute the operation and/or processing performed by the first node in the above method embodiment.
  • the storage unit 11032 may be a storage element on the same chip as the processing unit 11031, that is, an on-chip storage unit, or a storage element on a different chip from the processing unit 11031, that is, an off-chip storage unit.
  • the network device when the network device is the second node, the network device can implement the operations and/or processing performed by the second node in the above method embodiments by calling a program by the processing unit.
  • the network device when the network device is the host node, the network device can implement the operations and/or processing performed by the host node in the above method embodiments by calling a program by the processing unit.
  • the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more of them used to control the technology of the application Integrated circuits for program execution, etc.
  • the processor may be a digital signal processor device, a microprocessor device, an analog-to-digital converter, a digital-to-analog converter, etc.
  • the processor can distribute control and signal processing functions of terminal devices or network devices among these devices according to their respective functions.
  • the processor may have a function of operating one or more software programs, and the software programs may be stored in the memory.
  • the functions of the processor can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the memory can be read-only memory (ROM), other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), or other types that can store information and instructions
  • Dynamic storage devices can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or other optical disk storage, optical disc storage ( Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can Any other medium accessed by the computer, etc.
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • optical disc storage Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.
  • magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can Any other medium
  • the units can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professional technicians can use different methods for each specific application to achieve the described functions.
  • the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or may be Integrate into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented.
  • the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
  • each unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .

Abstract

Provided are a radio link control (RLC) bearer configuration method and apparatus, which can improve the reliability of data transmission on a backhaul link in an IAB network. The method comprises: a first node receiving a first configuration message from a host centralized unit (CU), wherein the first configuration message is used for indicating the configuration of a first RLC bearer pair between the first node and a second node, the first RLC bearer pair is used for transmitting a data packet of a first radio bearer of a first terminal device, the first radio bearer is configured with the function of copying and transmitting the data packet, and the first node is a father node of the second node; and the first node configuring the first RLC bearer pair according to the first configuration message, wherein the first RLC bearer pair comprises a first RLC bearer and a second RLC bearer.

Description

配置无线链路控制RLC承载的方法和装置Method and device for configuring radio link control RLC bearer
本申请要求于2019年3月28日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为201910245334.8、申请名称为“配置无线链路控制RLC承载的方法和装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of a Chinese patent application filed with the State Intellectual Property Office on March 28, 2019, the application number is 201910245334.8, and the application name is "Method and device for configuring radio link control RLC bearer", the entire content of which is by reference Incorporated in this application.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及接入回传一体化IAB网络,尤其涉及一种IAB网络中配置无线链路控制RLC承载的方法和装置。This application relates to access to an integrated backhaul IAB network, and in particular to a method and device for configuring a radio link control RLC bearer in an IAB network.
背景技术Background technique
为满足第五代(the 5th generation,5G)移动通信系统的超高容量需求,高频小站组网成为主流。高频载波传播特性较差,受遮挡衰减严重,覆盖范围不广,故而需要大量、密集部署小站。相应地,为这些大量密集部署的小站提供光纤回传的代价很高,施工难度大,因此需要经济便捷的回传方案。另外,从广覆盖需求的角度出发,在一些偏远地区提供网络覆盖,光纤的部署难度大,成本高,也需要设计灵活便利的接入和回传方案。接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul,IAB)技术为解决上述问题提供了思路。IAB网络的接入链路(access Link)和回传链路(backhaul link)皆采用无线传输方案,可以避免光纤部署。In order to meet the ultra-high capacity requirements of the 5th generation (5G) mobile communication system, high-frequency small station networking has become the mainstream. The high-frequency carrier has poor propagation characteristics, severe attenuation due to obstruction, and limited coverage. Therefore, a large number of densely deployed small stations are required. Correspondingly, the cost of providing optical fiber backhaul for these large numbers of densely deployed small stations is high, and the construction is difficult, so an economic and convenient backhaul solution is required. In addition, from the perspective of wide coverage requirements, to provide network coverage in some remote areas, the deployment of optical fibers is difficult and costly, and flexible and convenient access and backhaul solutions need to be designed. Integrated access and backhaul (IAB) technology provides ideas for solving the above problems. Both the access link and backhaul link of the IAB network adopt wireless transmission schemes, which can avoid optical fiber deployment.
在IAB网络中,涉及到多跳传输且网络拓扑较为复杂,如何提高数据传输的可靠性是一个亟待解决的问题。In the IAB network, multi-hop transmission is involved and the network topology is relatively complicated. How to improve the reliability of data transmission is an urgent problem to be solved.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供一种配置RLC承载的方法和装置,能够提高IAB网络的回传链路的数据传输的可靠性。The present application provides a method and device for configuring an RLC bearer, which can improve the reliability of data transmission on the backhaul link of an IAB network.
第一方面,本申请提供一种配置RLC承载的方法,可以由第一节点或者第一节点中的芯片执行。该方法包括:第一节点从宿主集中式单元CU接收第一配置消息,第一配置消息用于指示配置第一节点和第二节点之间的第一无线链路控制RLC承载对,所述第一RLC承载对用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包,所述第一无线承载具备数据包的复制传输的功能,第一RLC承载对包含第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载,第一节点为第二节点的父节点;第一节点根据第一配置消息,配置所述第一RLC承载对。In the first aspect, this application provides a method for configuring an RLC bearer, which may be executed by the first node or a chip in the first node. The method includes: a first node receives a first configuration message from a donor centralized unit CU, the first configuration message is used to instruct to configure a first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the first node and the second node, and the first node An RLC bearer pair is used to transmit the data packet of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device. The first radio bearer has the function of copying and transmitting the data packet. The first RLC bearer pair includes a first RLC bearer and a second RLC bearer , The first node is the parent node of the second node; the first node configures the first RLC bearer pair according to the first configuration message.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一配置消息中包含所述第一RLC承载的第一配置内容和所述第二RLC承载的第二配置内容,所述第一配置内容和所述第二配置内容满足如下任意一种方式:所述第一配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和所述第二RLC承载的标识,所述第二配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一RLC承载的标识;或者,所述第一配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和第一 标识,所述第二配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一标识,所述第一标识用于关联所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载组成所述第一RLC承载对。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first configuration message includes the first configuration content carried by the first RLC and the second configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the first configuration message The configuration content and the second configuration content satisfy any one of the following ways: the first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the second configuration content includes The identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer; or, the first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the first identity, and the second configuration content includes all The identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, where the first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一标识为第一无线承载的标识。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementation manners of the first aspect, the first identifier is an identifier of the first radio bearer.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一配置消息中包含服务质量QoS信息和第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一节点根据所述QoS信息配置所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载,以组成所述第一RLC承载对。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first configuration message includes quality of service QoS information and first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the first node to configure according to the QoS information The first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer form the first RLC bearer pair.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该还包括:第一节点向宿主CU发送第一响应消息,第一响应消息中携带所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识和/或所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, this further includes: the first node sends a first response message to the host CU, the first response message carries an identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer And/or the second RLC bears the identifier of the corresponding logical channel.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一响应消息中还携带所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的信息和/或所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的信息。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first response message also carries information about the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and/or the second RLC bearer corresponds to each Serving cell information available for the logical channel.
可选地,所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区不同;或者,Optionally, the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer are different; or,
所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的列表不同,所述不同的服务小区的列表中的服务小区无交集;或者,The lists of available serving cells for the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer are different, and the serving cells in the lists of different serving cells have no intersection; or,
所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的小区组不同,所述不同的小区组中的服务小区无交集。The first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer have different cell groups of available serving cells for corresponding logical channels, and there is no intersection between the serving cells in the different cell groups.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一响应消息中还携带第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一RLC承载为主路径的RLC承载。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first response message further carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer is the RLC bearer of the main path.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该还包括:第一节点接收第二节点仅在所述第一RLC承载上发送的所述第一无线承载的数据包。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, this further includes: the first node receiving the data packet of the first radio bearer that the second node sends only on the first RLC bearer.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一节点为中间回传节点,该方法还包括:第一节点从宿主CU接收第一通知消息,所述第一通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,所述第一通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first node is an intermediate backhaul node, and the method further includes: the first node receives a first notification message from the host CU, where the first notification message is used for Indicate the activation of the restriction on the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the restriction on the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, or the first notification message is used to instruct to cancel the The first RLC bearer has a restriction on the available serving cell of the logical channel and the second RLC bearer has a restriction on the available serving cell of the logical channel.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:第一节点从宿主CU接收第二通知消息,第二通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者第二通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制;With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first node receives a second notification message from the home CU, the second notification message is used to instruct to enable the logic corresponding to the first RLC bearer The restriction on the serving cell available for the channel and the restriction on the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, or the second notification message is used to instruct to cancel the restriction on the available serving cell for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer Restriction of available serving cells for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer;
所述第一节点向所述第二节点发送第三通知消息,所述第三通知消息用于向所述第二节点指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者所述第三通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。The first node sends a third notification message to the second node, where the third notification message is used to indicate to the second node to enable the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and The second RLC bearer corresponds to the restriction on the serving cell available for the logical channel, or the third notification message is used to instruct to cancel the restriction on the available serving cell for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC It bears the limitation of the available serving cell of the corresponding logical channel.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一节点根据第一配置消息,配置所 述第一RLC承载对之后,该方法还包括:第一节点将从两个不同的逻辑信道上接收到的所述第一无线承载的数据包分别映射到所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载上。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, after the first node configures the first RLC bearer pair according to the first configuration message, the method further includes: The data packets of the first radio bearer received on the channel are respectively mapped to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
结合第一方面,在第一方面的某些实现方式中,第一节点为宿主分布式单元DU,该还包括:第一节点将第一无线承载对应的两个不同的通用分组无线服务隧道协议GTP隧道上接收到的数据包分别映射到所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载上。With reference to the first aspect, in some implementations of the first aspect, the first node is the host distributed unit DU, which further includes: the first node associates two different general packet radio service tunnel protocols corresponding to the first radio bearer The data packets received on the GTP tunnel are respectively mapped to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
第二方面,本申请提供一种配置RLC承载的方法,可以由第二节点或者第二节点中的芯片执行。该方法包括:第二节点从宿主集中式单元CU接收第二配置消息,第二配置消息用于指示配置第二节点和第一节点之间的第一无线链路控制RLC承载对,所述第一RLC承载对用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包,所述第一无线承载具备数据包的复制传输的功能,第一RLC承载对包含第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载,第二节点为第一节点的子节点;第二节点根据第二配置消息,配置所述第一RLC承载对。In the second aspect, this application provides a method for configuring an RLC bearer, which may be executed by the second node or a chip in the second node. The method includes: a second node receives a second configuration message from a donor centralized unit CU, the second configuration message is used to instruct to configure a first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the second node and the first node, and the second node An RLC bearer pair is used to transmit the data packet of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device. The first radio bearer has the function of copying and transmitting the data packet. The first RLC bearer pair includes a first RLC bearer and a second RLC bearer , The second node is a child node of the first node; the second node configures the first RLC bearer pair according to the second configuration message.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第二配置消息中包含所述第一RLC承载的第三配置内容和所述第二RLC承载的第四配置内容,所述第三配置内容和所述第四配置内容满足如下任意一种方式:所述第三配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和所述第二RLC承载的标识,所述第四配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一RLC承载的标识;或者,所述第三配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和第一标识,所述第四配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一标识,所述第一标识用于关联所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载组成所述第一RLC承载对。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the second configuration message includes the third configuration content carried by the first RLC and the fourth configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the third configuration message The configuration content and the fourth configuration content satisfy any one of the following methods: the third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the fourth configuration content includes The identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer; or, the third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the first identity, and the fourth configuration content includes all The identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, where the first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第一标识为所述第一无线承载的标识。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementation manners of the second aspect, the first identifier is an identifier of the first radio bearer.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第二配置消息中还携带第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一RLC承载为主路径的RLC承载。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the second configuration message further carries third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer is an RLC bearer of the main path.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该还包括:第二节点从宿主CU接收到用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制的第一通知消息的情况下,第二节点仅通过所述第一RLC承载向第一节点传输数据包;或者,第二节点从一个逻辑信道接收到所述第一无线承载的数据包时,第二节点仅通过所述第一RLC承载向第一节点传输所述数据包;或者,第二节点确定所述第一无线承载的数据包的数据量不超过预设门限时,第二节点仅通过所述第一RLC承载向第一节点传输数据包。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, this further includes: the second node receives from the donor CU the logical channel used to instruct to cancel the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer, respectively In the case of the first notification message of the limitation of available serving cells, the second node only transmits data packets to the first node through the first RLC bearer; or, the second node receives the first radio from a logical channel When carrying data packets, the second node only transmits the data packets to the first node through the first RLC bearer; or, the second node determines that the data volume of the data packets of the first radio bearer does not exceed a preset threshold Within a limited time, the second node only transmits data packets to the first node through the first RLC bearer.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该还包括:第二节点从宿主CU接收第一通知消息,所述第一通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,所述第一通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, this further includes: the second node receives a first notification message from the donor CU, where the first notification message is used to instruct to enable the corresponding first RLC bearer The limit of the serving cell available for the logical channel and the limit of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, or the first notification message is used to instruct to cancel the available logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer The limitation of the serving cell and the limitation of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,该还包括:第二节点从第一节点接收第三通知消息,所述第三通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,所述第三通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, this further includes: the second node receives a third notification message from the first node, where the third notification message is used to instruct to enable the first RLC bearer corresponding The limit of the available serving cell of the logical channel and the limit of the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, or the third notification message is used to instruct to cancel the availability of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer The limitation of the serving cell and the limitation of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第二节点为服务于所述第一终端设备 的接入回传节点,第二节点从宿主CU接收第一通知消息之前,该方法还包括:第二节点确定所述第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态,所述激活状态包括激活和去激活;第二节点向宿主CU指示所述第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, the second node is an access backhaul node serving the first terminal device, and before the second node receives the first notification message from the host CU, the method The method further includes: the second node determines the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer, the activation state includes activation and deactivation; the second node instructs the host CU to copy the data packet of the first radio bearer The activation status of the transmission function.
结合第二方面,在第二方面的某些实现方式中,第二节点根据第二配置消息,配置所述第一RLC承载对之后,该方法还包括:第二节点将从两个不同的逻辑信道上接收到的所述第一无线承载的数据包分别映射到所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载上。With reference to the second aspect, in some implementations of the second aspect, after the second node configures the first RLC bearer pair according to the second configuration message, the method further includes: The data packets of the first radio bearer received on the channel are respectively mapped to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
第三方面,本申请提供一种配置RLC承载的方法,可以由CU或者CU中的芯片执行。该方法包括:宿主集中式单元CU生成第一配置消息,第一配置消息用于指示配置第一节点和第二节点之间的第一无线链路控制RLC承载对,所述第一RLC承载对用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包,所述第一无线承载具备数据包的复制传输的功能,第一RLC承载对包含第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载,第一节点为第二节点的父节点;宿主CU向第一节点发送第一配置消息。In the third aspect, this application provides a method for configuring the RLC bearer, which can be executed by the CU or the chip in the CU. The method includes: a donor centralized unit CU generates a first configuration message, the first configuration message is used to instruct to configure a first radio link control RLC bearer pair between a first node and a second node, and the first RLC bearer pair It is used to transmit the data packet of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device. The first radio bearer has the function of copying and transmitting the data packet. The first RLC bearer pair includes the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. The first node Is the parent node of the second node; the host CU sends the first configuration message to the first node.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第一配置消息中包含所述第一RLC承载的第一配置内容和所述第二RLC承载的第二配置内容,所述第一配置内容和所述第二配置内容满足如下任意一种方式:所述第一配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和所述第二RLC承载的标识,所述第二配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一RLC承载的标识;或者,所述第一配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和第一标识,所述第二配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一标识,所述第一标识用于关联所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载组成所述第一RLC承载对。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first configuration message includes the first configuration content carried by the first RLC and the second configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the first configuration message The configuration content and the second configuration content satisfy any one of the following ways: the first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the second configuration content includes The identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer; or, the first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the first identity, and the second configuration content includes all The identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, where the first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第一标识为所述第一无线承载的标识。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the first identifier is an identifier of the first radio bearer.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第一配置消息中包含服务质量QoS信息和第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示第一节点根据所述QoS信息配置所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载,以组成所述第一RLC承载对。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first configuration message includes quality of service QoS information and first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the first node to configure according to the QoS information The first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer form the first RLC bearer pair.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,该还包括:宿主CU从第一节点接收第一响应消息,第一响应消息中携带所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识和/或所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, this further includes: the host CU receives a first response message from the first node, the first response message carries an identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer And/or the second RLC bears the identifier of the corresponding logical channel.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第一响应消息中还携带第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述第一RLC承载为主路径的RLC承载。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the first response message further carries second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer is the RLC bearer of the main path.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,该方法还包括:宿主CU生成第二配置消息,第二配置消息用于指示配置第二节点和第一节点之间的所述第一无线链路控制RLC承载对;宿主CU向第二节点发送第二配置消息。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the method further includes: the host CU generates a second configuration message, where the second configuration message is used to instruct to configure the first node between the second node and the first node. A radio link control RLC bearer pair; the donor CU sends a second configuration message to the second node.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第二配置消息中包含所述第一RLC承载的第三配置内容和所述第二RLC承载的第四配置内容,所述第三配置内容和所述第四配置内容满足如下任意一种方式:所述第三配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和所述第二RLC承载的标识,所述第四配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一RLC承载的标识;或者,所述第三配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和第一标识,所述第四配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一标识,所述第一标识用于关联所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载组成所述第一RLC承载对。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the second configuration message includes the third configuration content carried by the first RLC and the fourth configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the third configuration message The configuration content and the fourth configuration content satisfy any one of the following methods: the third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the fourth configuration content includes The identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer; or, the third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the first identity, and the fourth configuration content includes all The identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, where the first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第一标识为所述第一无线承载的标识。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementation manners of the third aspect, the first identifier is an identifier of the first radio bearer.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,第二配置消息中还携带第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一RLC承载为主路径的RLC承载。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, the second configuration message further carries third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer is the RLC bearer of the primary path.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,完成第一RLC承载对的配置之后,该方法还包括:宿主CU向第一节点和第二节点发送第一通知消息,所述第一通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,所述第一通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, after the configuration of the first RLC bearer pair is completed, the method further includes: the host CU sends a first notification message to the first node and the second node, and the A notification message is used to indicate to enable the restriction of the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the restriction of the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, or the first notification message is used For instructing to cancel the restriction on the serving cell that is available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the restriction on the available serving cell for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
结合第三方面,在第三方面的某些实现方式中,宿主CU发送所述第一通知消息之前,该方法还包括:宿主CU确定所述第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态,所述激活状态包括激活和去激活;或者,宿主CU从服务于第一终端设备的接入回传节点接收用于指示第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态的信息,所述激活状态包括激活和去激活。With reference to the third aspect, in some implementations of the third aspect, before the host CU sends the first notification message, the method further includes: the host CU determines the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer , The activation state includes activation and deactivation; or, the host CU receives from the access backhaul node serving the first terminal device information indicating the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer, The activation state includes activation and deactivation.
第四方面,本申请提供一种传输数据包的装置,所述装置具有实现第一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In a fourth aspect, the present application provides a device for transmitting data packets. The device has the function of implementing the method in the first aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof. The function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
第五方面,本申请提供一种传输数据包的装置,所述装置具有实现第二方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In the fifth aspect, this application provides a device for transmitting data packets, the device having the function of implementing the method in the second aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof. The function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
第六方面,本申请提供一种传输数据包的装置,所述装置具有实现第三方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的方法的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元。In a sixth aspect, this application provides a device for transmitting data packets. The device has the function of implementing the method in the third aspect and any possible implementation manners thereof. The function can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more units corresponding to the above functions.
第七方面,本申请提供一种网络设备,包括处理器和存储器。存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于调用并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,使得网络设备执行上述第一方面或第一方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, this application provides a network device including a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the network device executes the foregoing first aspect or the method in any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
第八方面,本申请提供一种网络设备,包括处理器和存储器。存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于调用并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,使得网络设备执行上述第二方面或第二方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In an eighth aspect, this application provides a network device including a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the network device executes the foregoing second aspect or any possible implementation method of the second aspect.
第九方面,本申请提供一种网络设备,包括处理器和存储器。存储器用于存储计算机程序,处理器用于调用并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,使得网络设备执行上述第三方面或第三方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a ninth aspect, this application provides a network device including a processor and a memory. The memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the network device executes the foregoing third aspect or any possible implementation method of the third aspect.
第十方面,本申请提供一种芯片,包括处理器。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行第一方面或第一方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a tenth aspect, this application provides a chip including a processor. The processor is used to read and execute a computer program stored in the memory to execute the method in the first aspect or any possible implementation manner of the first aspect.
可选地,所述芯片还包括存储器,存储器与处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接,存储器用于存储计算机程序。Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or wire, and the memory is used to store a computer program.
进一步可选地,所述芯片还包括通信接口。Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface.
第十一方面,本申请提供一种芯片,包括处理器。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行第二方面或第二方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In an eleventh aspect, this application provides a chip including a processor. The processor is used to read and execute the computer program stored in the memory to execute the second aspect or any possible implementation method of the second aspect.
可选地,所述芯片还包括存储器,存储器与处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接,存 储器用于存储计算机程序。Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or a wire, and the memory is used for storing computer programs.
进一步可选地,所述芯片还包括通信接口。Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface.
第十二方面,本申请提供一种芯片,包括处理器。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行第三方面或第三方面任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a twelfth aspect, this application provides a chip including a processor. The processor is used to read and execute a computer program stored in the memory to execute the third aspect or any possible implementation method of the third aspect.
可选地,所述芯片还包括存储器,存储器与处理器通过电路或电线与存储器连接,存储器用于存储计算机程序。Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, and the memory and the processor are connected to the memory through a circuit or wire, and the memory is used to store a computer program.
进一步可选地,所述芯片还包括通信接口。Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface.
第十三方面,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第一方面或其任意一种可能的实现方式中的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, this application also provides a computer program product, the computer program product comprising computer program code, when the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer can execute the first aspect or any one of its possibilities The method in the implementation.
第十四方面,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第二方面或其任意一种可能的实现方式中的方法。In a fourteenth aspect, this application also provides a computer program product. The computer program product includes computer program code. When the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the second aspect or any one of its possibilities. The method in the implementation.
第十五方面,本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述第三方面或其任意一种可能的实现方式中的方法。In a fifteenth aspect, this application also provides a computer program product. The computer program product includes computer program code. When the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer can execute the third aspect or any one of its possibilities. The method in the implementation.
第十六方面,本申请还提供一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面或其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a sixteenth aspect, this application also provides a computer storage medium that stores computer instructions in the computer-readable storage medium. When the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the first aspect or any of its possible implementations. Method in.
第十七方面,本申请还提供一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第二方面或其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a seventeenth aspect, the present application also provides a computer storage medium that stores computer instructions in the computer-readable storage medium. When the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the second aspect or any of its possible implementations. Method in.
第十八方面,本申请还提供一种计算机存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第三方面或其任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In an eighteenth aspect, this application also provides a computer storage medium in which computer instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium. When the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer executes the third aspect or any possible implementation manner thereof Method in.
本申请的技术方案,通过在回传链路的父节点和子节点之间配置RLC承载对,可以支持将终端设备的配置了数据包复制传输功能的无线承载的数据包分别映射到所述RLC承载对包含的两个RLC承载上进行传输,从而可以在回传链路上支持一个无线承载的数据包通过不同的RLC承载向下一跳传输,提高了回传链路上传输数据包的可靠性。The technical solution of the present application, by configuring an RLC bearer pair between the parent node and the child node of the backhaul link, can support the mapping of the data packets of the radio bearer configured with the data packet replication transmission function of the terminal device to the RLC bearer respectively Transmission is carried out on the two included RLC bearers, so that the data packet of one radio bearer can be transmitted on the backhaul link to the next hop through different RLC bearers, which improves the reliability of data packet transmission on the backhaul link .
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1是适用于本申请的技术方案的IAB系统的架构图。Figure 1 is an architecture diagram of an IAB system suitable for the technical solution of the present application.
图2为IAB节点的组成的示意图。Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of the composition of an IAB node.
图3的(a)和(b)为中间IAB节点的协议栈架构的示例。Figure 3 (a) and (b) are examples of the protocol stack architecture of the intermediate IAB node.
图4为多跳IAB网络的用户面协议栈架构的一种示例。Figure 4 is an example of the user plane protocol stack architecture of a multi-hop IAB network.
图5为多跳IAB网络的控制面协议栈架构的一种示例。Figure 5 is an example of the control plane protocol stack architecture of a multi-hop IAB network.
图6为RLC信道、逻辑信道以及协议实体之间映射关系的示意图。Fig. 6 is a schematic diagram of the mapping relationship among RLC channels, logical channels, and protocol entities.
图7是IAB系统的一个具体示例。Figure 7 is a specific example of the IAB system.
图8(a)和(b)是UE支持数据包的复制操作的发送场景。Figure 8 (a) and (b) are sending scenarios where the UE supports the copy operation of the data packet.
图9是IAB网络中支持UE执行数据包复制操作的场景的示例。Fig. 9 is an example of a scenario where a UE is supported to perform a data packet copy operation in an IAB network.
图10是本申请提供的传输数据包的方法的示意性流程图。FIG. 10 is a schematic flowchart of a method for transmitting data packets provided by the present application.
图11为本申请提供的配置RLC承载的装置500的示意性结构图。FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 500 for configuring an RLC bearer provided by this application.
图12为本申请提供的配置RLC承载的装置600的示意性结构图。FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 600 for configuring an RLC bearer provided by this application.
图13为本申请提供的配置RLC承载的装置700的示意性结构图。FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 700 for configuring an RLC bearer provided by this application.
图14是本申请提供的网络设备1000的结构示意图。FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the network device 1000 provided by the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below in conjunction with the drawings.
其中,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示或的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B。本文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。并且,在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“多个”是指两个或多于两个。另外,为了便于清楚描述本申请实施例的技术方案,在本申请的实施例中,采用了“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能和作用基本相同的相同项或相似项进行区分。本领域技术人员可以理解“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。Wherein, in the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means or, for example, A/B can mean A or B. The "and/or" in this article is only an association relationship describing the associated objects, which means that there can be three relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone These three situations. Also, in the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "plurality" means two or more than two. In addition, in order to facilitate a clear description of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, in the embodiments of the present application, words such as "first" and "second" are used to distinguish the same items or similar items with substantially the same function and effect. Those skilled in the art can understand that words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the quantity and order of execution, and words such as "first" and "second" do not limit the difference.
本申请中所有节点、消息的名称仅仅是为了描述方便而设定的名称,在实际网络中的名称可能不同,不应该理解本申请限定各种节点、消息的名称。相反,任何具有和本申请中用到的节点或消息具有相同或类似功能的名称都视作本申请的方法或等效替换,都在本申请的保护范围之内,以下不再赘述。The names of all nodes and messages in this application are only names set for the convenience of description. The names in the actual network may be different, and it should not be understood that this application limits the names of various nodes and messages. On the contrary, any name that has the same or similar function as the node or message used in this application is regarded as a method or equivalent replacement of this application, and is within the protection scope of this application, and will not be repeated hereafter.
本申请实施例提及的通信系统包括但不限于:窄带物联网(narrow band-internet of things,NB-IoT)系统、无线局域网(wireless local access network,WLAN)系统、LTE系统、下一代5G移动通信系统或者5G之后的通信系统,例如NR、设备到设备(device to device,D2D)通信系统等。The communication systems mentioned in the embodiments of this application include but are not limited to: narrowband-internet of things (NB-IoT) system, wireless local access network (WLAN) system, LTE system, next-generation 5G mobile Communication systems or communication systems after 5G, such as NR, device-to-device (D2D) communication systems, etc.
本申请提及的基站包括但不限于:演进型节点B(evolved node base,eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller,RNC)、节点B(node B,NB)、基站控制器(base station controller,BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station,BTS)、家庭基站(home evolved NodeB,或home node B,HNB)、基带单元(baseband Unit,BBU)、演进的(evolved LTE,eLTE)基站、NR基站(next generation node B,gNB)等。The base stations mentioned in this application include but are not limited to: evolved node B (evolved node base, eNB), radio network controller (RNC), node B (node B, NB), base station controller (base station) controller, BSC), base transceiver station (BTS), home base station (home evolved NodeB, or home node B, HNB), baseband unit (BBU), evolved (evolved LTE, eLTE) base station, NR base station (next generation node B, gNB), etc.
终端设备包括但不限于:用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、终端、无线通信设备、用户代理、无线局域网(wireless local access network,WLAN)中的站点(station,ST)、蜂窝电话、无绳电话、会话启动协议(session initiation protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(wireless local loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(personal digital assistant,PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备、连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、未来5G网络中的移动台以及未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(public land mobile network,PLMN)网络中的终端设备等中的任意一种。Terminal equipment includes but is not limited to: user equipment (UE), mobile station, access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile equipment, terminal, wireless communication equipment, user agent, Station (ST), cell phone, cordless phone, session initiation protocol (SIP) phone, wireless local loop (wireless local loop, WLL) station in wireless local area network (wireless local access network, WLAN) Personal digital assistant (PDA), handheld devices with wireless communication functions, computing devices, other processing devices connected to wireless modems, in-vehicle devices, wearable devices, mobile stations in the future 5G network, and public Any of the terminal devices in the public land mobile network (PLMN) network.
无线回传节点(也可以称为IAB节点)用于为无线接入无线回传节点的节点(例如, 终端)提供无线回传(backhaul)服务。其中,无线回传服务是指通过无线回传链路提供的数据和/或信令回传服务。IAB节点是中继节点的特定的名称,不对本申请的方案构成限定,可以是一种具有转发功能的上述基站或者终端设备中的一种,也可以是一种独立的设备形态。在包含IAB节点的网络(以下简称IAB网络)中,IAB节点可以为终端提供无线接入服务,并通过无线回传链路连接到宿主基站(donor gNB)传输用户的业务数据。The wireless backhaul node (may also be referred to as an IAB node) is used to provide a wireless backhaul service for a node (for example, a terminal) that wirelessly accesses the wireless backhaul node. Among them, the wireless backhaul service refers to the data and/or signaling backhaul service provided through the wireless backhaul link. The IAB node is a specific name of a relay node, which does not limit the solution of the present application. It may be one of the aforementioned base stations or terminal devices with a forwarding function, or may be an independent device form. In a network containing IAB nodes (hereinafter referred to as IAB networks), the IAB nodes can provide wireless access services for terminals, and are connected to a donor base station (donor gNB) through a wireless backhaul link to transmit user service data.
示例性的,IAB节点还可以是用户驻地设备(customer premises equipment,简称CPE)、家庭网关(residential gateway,简称RG)等设备。该情况下,本申请实施例提供的方法还可以应用于家庭连接(home access)的场景中。Exemplarily, the IAB node may also be equipment such as customer premises equipment (CPE for short) and residential gateway (RG for short). In this case, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to a home access scenario.
参见图1,图1是适用于本申请的技术方案的IAB系统的架构图。如图1所示,一个IAB系统至少包括一个基站100,以及基站100所服务的一个或多个终端设备(terminal)101,一个或多个中继节点(也即,IAB节点)110,以及IAB节点110所服务的一个或多个终端设备111。IAB节点110通过无线回传链路113连接到基站100。通常,基站100被称为宿主基站。可替换地,宿主基站在本申请中也称为宿主节点或donor节点或IAB宿主(IAB donor)。除此之外,IAB系统还可以包括一个或多个中间IAB节点。例如,IAB节点120和IAB节点130。Refer to Fig. 1, which is an architecture diagram of an IAB system applicable to the technical solution of the present application. As shown in Figure 1, an IAB system includes at least one base station 100, and one or more terminal devices (terminal) 101 served by the base station 100, one or more relay nodes (that is, IAB nodes) 110, and IAB One or more terminal devices 111 served by the node 110. The IAB node 110 is connected to the base station 100 through a wireless backhaul link 113. Generally, the base station 100 is called a donor base station. Alternatively, the donor base station is also referred to as a donor node or a donor node or an IAB donor (IAB donor) in this application. In addition, the IAB system may also include one or more intermediate IAB nodes. For example, IAB node 120 and IAB node 130.
宿主基站可以是一个具有完整基站功能的接入网网元,还可以是集中式单元(centralized unit,简称CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,简称DU)分离的形态,即宿主节点由宿主基站的集中式单元和宿主基站的分布式单元组成。本文中,宿主节点的集中式单元也称为IAB donor CU(也可称作donor CU,或直接称为CU)。宿主节点的分布式单元也称为IAB donor DU(或称作donor DU)。其中donor CU还有可能是控制面(control plane,CP)(本文中简称为CU-CP)和用户面(user plane,UP)(本文中简称为CU-UP)分离的形态。例如CU可由一个CU-CP和一个或多个CU-UP组成。The donor base station can be an access network element with complete base station functions, or it can be a form in which a centralized unit (centralized unit, referred to as CU) and a distributed unit (abbreviated as DU) are separated, that is, the host node is controlled by the donor base station. The centralized unit and the distributed unit of the donor base station. In this article, the centralized unit of the host node is also called IAB donor CU (also called donor CU, or directly called CU). The distributed unit of the host node is also called IAB donor DU (or donor DU). Among them, the donor CU may also be a form where the control plane (CP) (referred to as CU-CP in this article) and the user plane (UP) (referred to in this article as CU-UP) are separated. For example, a CU may be composed of one CU-CP and one or more CU-UPs.
本申请实施例中以及附图中均以宿主节点由Donor-CU和Donor-DU组成为例对本申请实施例提供的方法作示例性说明。In the embodiments of the present application and in the accompanying drawings, the host node is composed of Donor-CU and Donor-DU as an example to illustrate the method provided in the embodiments of the present application.
下面结合图1对IAB系统中涉及到的概念作简单介绍。The following is a brief introduction to the concepts involved in the IAB system in conjunction with Figure 1.
1、基本概念。1. Basic concepts.
链路:是指一条路径中的两个相邻节点之间的路径。Link: Refers to the path between two adjacent nodes in a path.
接入链路:终端设备与基站之间,或者终端设备与IAB节点之间,或者终端设备与宿主节点之间,或者终端设备与宿主DU之间的链路。或者,接入链路包括某个IAB节点作为普通终端设备角色时和它的父节点进行通信时所使用的无线链路。IAB节点作为普通终端设备角色时,不为任何子节点提供回传服务。接入链路包括上行接入链路和下行接入链路。本申请中,终端设备的接入链路为无线链路,故接入链路也可被称为无线接入链路。Access link: the link between the terminal device and the base station, or between the terminal device and the IAB node, or between the terminal device and the host node, or between the terminal device and the host DU. Or, the access link includes a wireless link used when a certain IAB node is in the role of a common terminal device to communicate with its parent node. When the IAB node acts as an ordinary terminal device, it does not provide backhaul services for any child nodes. The access link includes an uplink access link and a downlink access link. In this application, the access link of the terminal device is a wireless link, so the access link may also be called a wireless access link.
回传链路:IAB节点作为无线回传节点时与父节点之间的链路。IAB节点作为无线回传节点时,为子节点提供无线回传服务。回传链路包括上行回传链路,以及下行回传链路。本申请中,IAB节点与父节点之间的回传链路为无线链路,故回传链路也可被称为无线回传链路。Backhaul link: the link between the IAB node and the parent node when it is used as a wireless backhaul node. When the IAB node is used as a wireless backhaul node, it provides wireless backhaul services for child nodes. The backhaul link includes an uplink backhaul link and a downlink backhaul link. In this application, the backhaul link between the IAB node and the parent node is a wireless link, so the backhaul link can also be called a wireless backhaul link.
父节点与子节点:每个IAB节点将为其提供无线接入服务和/或无线回传服务的相邻节点视为父节点(parent node)。相应地,每个IAB节点可视为其父节点的子节点(child node)。Parent node and child node: Each IAB node regards the neighboring node that provides wireless access service and/or wireless backhaul service for it as a parent node. Correspondingly, each IAB node can be regarded as a child node of its parent node.
可替换地,子节点也可以称为下级节点,父节点也可以称为上级节点。Alternatively, the child node may also be called a lower-level node, and the parent node may also be called an upper-level node.
节点的上一跳节点:是指在包含该节点的路径中的、在该节点之前最后一个接收到数据包的节点。可以理解为,节点的上一跳节点可以包括上行传输中该节点的上一跳节点,和下行传输中该节点的上一跳节点。The last hop node of a node: refers to the last node in the path containing the node that received the data packet before the node. It can be understood that the previous hop node of a node may include the previous hop node of the node in uplink transmission and the previous hop node of the node in downlink transmission.
节点的下一跳节点:是指在包含该节点的路径中的、在该节点之后第一个接收到数据包的节点。可以理解为,节点的下一跳节点可以包括上行传输中该节点的下一跳节点,和下行传输中该节点的下一跳节点。The next hop node of a node: refers to the node in the path containing the node that receives the data packet first after the node. It can be understood that the next hop node of a node may include the next hop node of the node in uplink transmission and the next hop node of the node in downlink transmission.
节点的入口链路:是指该节点与该节点的上一跳节点之间的链路,也可以称为节点的上一跳链路。可以理解为,节点的入口链路可以包括该节点在上行传输中的入口链路,和该节点在下行传输中的入口链路。The entry link of a node: refers to the link between the node and the previous hop node of the node, and can also be called the previous hop link of the node. It can be understood that the ingress link of the node may include the ingress link of the node in uplink transmission and the ingress link of the node in downlink transmission.
节点的出口链路:是指该节点与该节点的下一跳节点之间的链路,也可以称为节点的下一跳链路。可以理解为,节点的出口链路可以包括该节点在上行传输中的出口链路,和该节点在下行传输中的出口链路。The exit link of a node: refers to the link between the node and the next hop node of the node, and can also be called the next hop link of the node. It can be understood that the egress link of the node may include the egress link of the node in uplink transmission and the egress link of the node in downlink transmission.
接入IAB节点:是指终端接入的IAB节点,或者说为终端设备提供接入服务的IAB节点。Access IAB node: refers to the IAB node that the terminal accesses, or the IAB node that provides access services for the terminal device.
中间IAB节点:是指为其它IAB节点(例如,接入IAB节点或其它中间IAB节点)提供无线回传服务的IAB节点。Intermediate IAB node: refers to an IAB node that provides wireless backhaul services for other IAB nodes (for example, access IAB nodes or other intermediate IAB nodes).
2、IAB节点的组成。2. The composition of the IAB node.
IAB节点可以具有移动终端(mobile terminal,简称MT)的部分以及DU的部分。IAB节点利用MT部分与其父节点进行通信,IAB节点利用DU部分与其子节点(子节点可能是终端或另一IAB节点)通信。一个IAB节点可以通过MT部分与该IAB节点的至少一个父节点之间建立回传连接。一个IAB节点的DU部分可以为终端或其他IAB节点的MT部分提供接入服务。下面结合图2进行示例说明。The IAB node may have a mobile terminal (MT) part and a DU part. The IAB node uses the MT part to communicate with its parent node, and the IAB node uses the DU part to communicate with its child nodes (the child node may be a terminal or another IAB node). An IAB node can establish a backhaul connection with at least one parent node of the IAB node through the MT part. The DU part of an IAB node can provide access services for the terminal or the MT part of other IAB nodes. The following is an example description with reference to Figure 2.
参见图2,图2为IAB节点的组成的示意图。UE通过IAB节点2和IAB节点1连接到宿主节点。其中,IAB节点1和IAB节点2均包括DU部分和MT部分。IAB节点2的DU部分为UE提供接入服务。IAB节点1的DU部分为IAB节点2的MT部分提供接入服务。宿主节点的DU部分为IAB节点1的MT部分提供接入服务。Refer to Figure 2, which is a schematic diagram of the composition of an IAB node. The UE is connected to the host node through IAB node 2 and IAB node 1. Among them, IAB node 1 and IAB node 2 both include a DU part and an MT part. The DU part of IAB node 2 provides access services for the UE. The DU part of IAB node 1 provides access services for the MT part of IAB node 2. The DU part of the host node provides access services for the MT part of the IAB node 1.
为了便于理解,还需要对IAB网络的协议栈进行介绍。IAB网络的协议栈包括用户面协议栈和控制面协议栈。In order to facilitate understanding, it is also necessary to introduce the protocol stack of the IAB network. The protocol stack of the IAB network includes the user plane protocol stack and the control plane protocol stack.
3、接入IAB节点、中间IAB节点、Donor-DU、Donor-CU以及终端设备的协议栈架构。3. Access to the protocol stack architecture of IAB nodes, intermediate IAB nodes, Donor-DU, Donor-CU and terminal equipment.
中间IAB节点在用户面和控制面的协议栈相同。图3的(a)和(b)为中间IAB节点的协议栈架构的示例。其中,中间IAB节点的MT部分和DU部分可以不共用适配(adapt)层,如图3的(a)所示。中间IAB节点的MT部分和DU部分也可以共用适配层,如图3的(b)所示。The intermediate IAB node has the same protocol stack on the user plane and the control plane. Figure 3 (a) and (b) are examples of the protocol stack architecture of the intermediate IAB node. Among them, the MT part and the DU part of the intermediate IAB node may not share an adaptation (adapt) layer, as shown in Figure 3(a). The MT part and the DU part of the intermediate IAB node can also share the adaptation layer, as shown in Figure 3(b).
接入IAB节点在用户面和控制面的协议栈不同,可分别参见4和图5所示中的IAB节点1。The protocol stacks for accessing the IAB node are different in the user plane and the control plane. Refer to the IAB node 1 shown in Figure 4 and Figure 5 respectively.
参见图4,图4为多跳IAB网络的用户面协议栈架构的一种示例。如图4中所示,在图4所示的协议架构中,各个协议层的含义为:分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence  protocol,PDCP)层、通用分组无线服务隧道协议用户面(general packet radio service tunneling protocol user plane,GTP-U)层、用户数据报协议(user datagram protocol,UDP)层、网络互连协议(internet protocol,IP)层、L2层(layer 2)、L1层(layer 1)、无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)层、媒介接入控制(medium access control,MAC)层、物理(physical,PHY)层、无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)层、F1应用协议(F1application protocol,F1AP)层、流控制传输协议(stream control transmission protocol,SCTP)层。其中,L2层为链路层。示例性的,L2层可以为开放式通信系统互联(open systems interconnection,OSI)参考模型中的数据链路层。L1层可以为物理层。示例性的,L1层可以为OSI参考模型中的物理层。Refer to FIG. 4, which is an example of a user plane protocol stack architecture of a multi-hop IAB network. As shown in Figure 4, in the protocol architecture shown in Figure 4, the meaning of each protocol layer is: Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer, General Packet Radio Service Tunneling Protocol user plane (general packet radio) service tunneling protocol user plane, GTP-U) layer, user datagram protocol (UDP) layer, internet protocol (IP) layer, L2 layer (layer 2), L1 layer (layer 1) , Radio link control (RLC) layer, medium access control (MAC) layer, physical (PHY) layer, radio resource control (RRC) layer, F1 application protocol (F1application protocol, F1AP) layer, stream control transmission protocol (stream control transmission protocol, SCTP) layer. Among them, the L2 layer is the link layer. Exemplarily, the L2 layer may be the data link layer in the open systems interconnection (OSI) reference model. The L1 layer can be a physical layer. Exemplarily, the L1 layer may be the physical layer in the OSI reference model.
为了满足终端设备不同类型业务的业务质量要求,无线网络中引入了一个或多个无线承载(radio bearer,RB),无线承载包括数据无线承载(data radio bearer,DRB)和信令无线承载(signaling raido bearer,SRB),用于在UE和基站之间传输不同类型的业务数据(包括控制面信令以及用户面数据)。在IAB网络中,RB可以认为是UE和宿主节点之间传输数据的逻辑通道。In order to meet the service quality requirements of different types of services of terminal equipment, one or more radio bearers (RB) are introduced into the wireless network. The radio bearers include data radio bearer (DRB) and signaling radio bearer (signaling). raido bearer, SRB), used to transmit different types of service data (including control plane signaling and user plane data) between the UE and the base station. In the IAB network, the RB can be considered as a logical channel for data transmission between the UE and the host node.
其中,每个协议层都会被配置与之对应的协议层实体,例如PDCP实体,RLC实体以及MAC实体等。在上行传输中,UE的数据包(例如IP数据包)在PDCP层经过相应处理之后,依次经过RLC层,MAC层和PHY层发送给接入回传节点(例如图4中所示的IAB节点2)的PHY层。Among them, each protocol layer will be configured with a corresponding protocol layer entity, such as a PDCP entity, an RLC entity, and a MAC entity. In the uplink transmission, the data packets of the UE (such as IP data packets) are processed in the PDCP layer, and then passed through the RLC layer, the MAC layer and the PHY layer to the access backhaul node (such as the IAB node shown in Figure 4). 2) The PHY layer.
如上文所述,在IAB网络中,IAB节点可以包含DU部分和MT部分。在IAB节点作为无线回传节点时,IAB节点的MT部分在回传链路执行数据转发不需要终端设备在无线接入链路的完整协议栈。例如,图4中所示的IAB节点2对于IAB节点1而言,IAB节点2为IAB节点1的子节点。IAB节点2将来自UE的数据包发送给IAB节点1时,IAB节点2的MT不需要PDCP层,数据包的转发是在适配层(adapt层)之下作转发的。因此,在图4中,IAB节点作为无线回传节点向其父节点发送数据包时,只涉及到适配层以下的协议层,这对所有的IAB节点都是适用的,不再赘述。As mentioned above, in an IAB network, an IAB node can include a DU part and an MT part. When the IAB node is used as a wireless backhaul node, the MT part of the IAB node performs data forwarding on the backhaul link without the complete protocol stack of the terminal device on the wireless access link. For example, the IAB node 2 shown in FIG. 4 is for the IAB node 1, and the IAB node 2 is a child node of the IAB node 1. When the IAB node 2 sends the data packet from the UE to the IAB node 1, the MT of the IAB node 2 does not need the PDCP layer, and the data packet is forwarded under the adaptation layer (adapt layer). Therefore, in Figure 4, when an IAB node acts as a wireless backhaul node to send a data packet to its parent node, only the protocol layer below the adaptation layer is involved, which is applicable to all IAB nodes and will not be repeated.
当IAB节点作为无线终端的角色时,其与父节点之间的通信链路的协议栈与UE和接入IAB节点之间的无线接入链路的协议栈相同,其与宿主CU之间的协议栈与UE和宿主CU之间的协议栈相同。When the IAB node plays the role of a wireless terminal, the protocol stack of the communication link between it and the parent node is the same as the protocol stack of the wireless access link between the UE and the access IAB node. The protocol stack is the same as the protocol stack between the UE and the host CU.
另外,图4中还示出了宿主CU和接入IAB节点(如图4中的IAB节点2)之间的F1接口的用户面协议栈。F1接口通过GTP-U协议层建立的GTP-U隧道和UE的数据无线承载DRB是一一对应的。换句话说,一个UE的每个无线承载都有一个GTP隧道与之一一对应。In addition, FIG. 4 also shows the user plane protocol stack of the F1 interface between the host CU and the access IAB node (IAB node 2 in FIG. 4). The GTP-U tunnel established by the F1 interface through the GTP-U protocol layer corresponds to the data radio bearer DRB of the UE. In other words, each radio bearer of a UE has a GTP tunnel corresponding to one of them.
参见图5,图5为多跳IAB网络的控制面协议栈架构的一种示例。图4中对各协议层的介绍在图5中也是适用的,但是也存在一些区别。例如,图5中接入IAB节点和宿主CU之间的F1接口采用的是F1控制面(F1-C)协议栈。Refer to FIG. 5, which is an example of a control plane protocol stack architecture of a multi-hop IAB network. The introduction of each protocol layer in Figure 4 is also applicable to Figure 5, but there are some differences. For example, in Figure 5, the F1 interface between the access IAB node and the host CU uses the F1 control plane (F1-C) protocol stack.
需要说明的是,图4和5分别示出了IAB网络中传输UE的数据业务的端到端用户面和控制面协议栈架构一种示例。可选地,协议栈架构还可以有其它的可能性。例如,在IAB2和宿主CU之间的F1接口引入用于安全保护的协议层,则协议栈架构会发生变化。It should be noted that FIGS. 4 and 5 respectively show an example of an end-to-end user plane and control plane protocol stack architecture for transmitting the data service of the UE in the IAB network. Optionally, the protocol stack architecture may also have other possibilities. For example, if the F1 interface between IAB2 and the host CU introduces a protocol layer for security protection, the protocol stack architecture will change.
另外,若宿主节点是功能完整的实体,则IAB donor保留donor DU和donor CU对外 部节点接口的协议栈即可,donor DU和donor CU之间的内部接口上的协议层不是必须的。类似地,IAB节点的协议栈,对外部而言,可以不区分DU部分和MT部分,只统一展示对外部节点接口的协议栈。In addition, if the host node is a fully functional entity, the IAB donor reserves the protocol stacks for the external node interfaces of donor DU and donor CU, and the protocol layer on the internal interface between donor DU and donor CU is not necessary. Similarly, the protocol stack of the IAB node does not distinguish between the DU part and the MT part to the outside, and only displays the protocol stack to the external node interface uniformly.
另外,不论是控制面的协议栈架构还是用户面的协议栈架构,在Donor-DU为Donor-CU和IAB节点之间的F1接口的代理节点时,Donor-DU中面向接入IAB节点的用户面协议栈架构中,在IP层之上,可以包括与接入IAB节点中的DU部分的协议栈架构中的UDP层和GTP-U层分别对等的UDP层和GTP-U层,还可以包含与接入IAB节点的DU部分对等的IPsec层;Donor-DU中面向接入IAB节点的控制面协议栈架构中,在IP层之上,可以包括与接入IAB节点中的DU部分的协议栈架构中的SCTP层和F1AP层分别对等的SCTP层和SCTP层,还可以包含与接入IAB节点的DU部分对等的IPsec层或DTLS层;。In addition, whether it is the control plane protocol stack architecture or the user plane protocol stack architecture, when Donor-DU is the proxy node of the F1 interface between Donor-CU and IAB nodes, Donor-DU faces users who access the IAB node In the surface protocol stack architecture, above the IP layer, it can include the UDP layer and the GTP-U layer, which are equivalent to the UDP layer and GTP-U layer in the protocol stack architecture of the DU part of the IAB node. Contains the IPsec layer equivalent to the DU part of the access IAB node; in the control plane protocol stack architecture of the Donor-DU facing the access IAB node, above the IP layer, it can include the DU part accessing the IAB node The SCTP layer and the F1AP layer in the protocol stack architecture are equivalent to the SCTP layer and the SCTP layer, respectively, and may also include an IPsec layer or DTLS layer that is equivalent to the DU part of the IAB node;
此外,图4和图5中还涉及到F1接口。In addition, Figures 4 and 5 also involve the F1 interface.
4、F1接口、F1接口的协议层4. The protocol layer of F1 interface and F1 interface
其中,F1接口是指IAB节点的DU部分和宿主节点(或donor-CU或donor-DU)之间的逻辑接口,F1接口也可以称为F1*接口,支持用户面以及控制面。F1接口的协议层是指在F1接口上的通信协议层。Among them, the F1 interface refers to the logical interface between the DU part of the IAB node and the host node (or donor-CU or donor-DU). The F1 interface can also be referred to as an F1* interface, which supports the user plane and the control plane. The protocol layer of the F1 interface refers to the communication protocol layer on the F1 interface.
示例性的,F1接口的用户面协议层可以包括IP层、UDP层、GTP-U层中的一个或多个。可选的,F1接口的用户面协议层还包括PDCP层和/或IP安全(IP Security,IPsec)层。Exemplarily, the user plane protocol layer of the F1 interface may include one or more of the IP layer, the UDP layer, and the GTP-U layer. Optionally, the user plane protocol layer of the F1 interface further includes a PDCP layer and/or an IP security (IP Security, IPsec) layer.
示例性的,F1接口的控制面协议层可以包括IP层、F1AP层、SCTP层中的一个或多个。可选的,F1接口的控制面协议层还包括PDCP层、IPsec层和数据报文传输层安全(datagram transport layer security,简称DTLS)层中的一个或多个。Exemplarily, the control plane protocol layer of the F1 interface may include one or more of the IP layer, the F1AP layer, and the SCTP layer. Optionally, the control plane protocol layer of the F1 interface further includes one or more of the PDCP layer, the IPsec layer, and the datagram transport layer security (DTLS) layer.
参见图6,图6为RLC信道、逻辑信道以及协议实体之间映射关系的示意图。如图6所示,RLC信道(RLC channel)是RLC层和上层协议层之间的信道。无线承载的配置对应有高层(例如,PDCP层)部分和低层(例如,RLC层和MAC层)部分的配置。Refer to FIG. 6, which is a schematic diagram of the mapping relationship between RLC channels, logical channels, and protocol entities. As shown in Figure 6, the RLC channel (RLC channel) is the channel between the RLC layer and the upper protocol layer. The configuration of the radio bearer corresponds to the configuration of the upper layer (for example, the PDCP layer) part and the lower layer (for example, the RLC layer and the MAC layer) part.
其中,RLC承载的配置是指RB在RLC层对应的配置,具体包括RLC层实体和逻辑信道的配置。本文中,IAB节点在回传链路的RLC承载,包括RLC层和逻辑信道部分。而回传链路上的RLC信道,即为RLC层和上层协议层之间的信道。例如,若RLC层的上层为PDCP层,则回传链路上的RLC信道是RLC层与PDCP层之间的信道。又例如,若RLC层的上层为适配层(也称为adapt层),则回传链路上的RLC信道是RLC层和适配层之间的信道。因此,RLC信道的定义具体视RLC层的上层协议层而定。IAB节点在回传链路上的RLC信道一一对应于一个RLC实体,也一一对应于一个RLC承载。Among them, the configuration of the RLC bearer refers to the configuration of the RB at the RLC layer, which specifically includes the configuration of the RLC layer entity and logical channel. In this article, the RLC bearer of the IAB node on the backhaul link includes the RLC layer and the logical channel part. The RLC channel on the backhaul link is the channel between the RLC layer and the upper protocol layer. For example, if the upper layer of the RLC layer is the PDCP layer, the RLC channel on the backhaul link is the channel between the RLC layer and the PDCP layer. For another example, if the upper layer of the RLC layer is an adaptation layer (also called an adapt layer), the RLC channel on the backhaul link is a channel between the RLC layer and the adaptation layer. Therefore, the definition of the RLC channel depends on the upper protocol layer of the RLC layer. The RLC channel of the IAB node on the backhaul link corresponds to one RLC entity one by one, and also corresponds to one RLC bearer.
其中,adapt实体和RLC实体之间可以是一个adapt实体对应多个RLC实体,如图6的(a)所示,也可以是一个adapt实体对应一个RLC实体,如图6的(b)所示,本申请对此不作限定。Among them, between the adapt entity and the RLC entity can be one adapt entity corresponding to multiple RLC entities, as shown in Figure 6(a), or one adapt entity corresponding to one RLC entity, as shown in Figure 6(b) , This application does not limit this.
另外,适配层具备以下能力中的一种或多种:为数据包添加能被无线回传节点(IAB节点)识别出的路由信息(routing information)、基于所述能被无线回传节点识别出的路由信息执行路由选择、为数据包添加能被无线回传节点识别出的与服务质量(quality of service,QoS)需求相关的标识信息、为数据包执行在包含无线回传节点的多段链路上的 QoS映射、为数据包添加数据包类型指示信息、向具有流量控制能力的节点发送流控反馈信息。In addition, the adaptation layer has one or more of the following capabilities: adding routing information (routing information) that can be recognized by the wireless backhaul node (IAB node) to the data packet, and based on the above can be recognized by the wireless backhaul node Perform routing selection on the outgoing routing information, add identification information related to the quality of service (QoS) requirements that can be identified by the wireless backhaul node for the data packet, and execute the data packet on the multi-segment chain containing the wireless backhaul node QoS mapping on the road, adding data packet type indication information to data packets, and sending flow control feedback information to nodes with flow control capabilities.
其中,所述能被无线回传节点识别出的路由信息可以是终端的标识,终端接入的IAB节点的标识,宿主节点的标识,Donor-DU的标识,Donor-CU的标识,传输路径的标识等信息中的一种或多种。Wherein, the routing information that can be recognized by the wireless backhaul node may be the identification of the terminal, the identification of the IAB node that the terminal accesses, the identification of the host node, the identification of Donor-DU, the identification of Donor-CU, the identification of the transmission path One or more of the information such as identification.
所述多段链路上的QoS映射可以为:在无线回传链路中基于数据包携带的终端的RB的标识,执行从终端的RB到无线回传链路上的RLC承载或RLC信道或逻辑信道的映射;或者,基于入口链路和出口链路的RB、RLC承载、RLC信道和逻辑信道中的任意两个或更多个之间的对应关系,执行从入口链路的RB或RLC承载或RLC信道或逻辑信道,到出口链路的RB或RLC承载或RLC信道或逻辑信道的映射。The QoS mapping on the multi-segment link may be: in the wireless backhaul link, based on the identification of the RB of the terminal carried in the data packet, execute the RLC bearer or RLC channel or logic from the RB of the terminal to the wireless backhaul link. Channel mapping; or, based on the correspondence between any two or more of the ingress link and egress link RB, RLC bearer, RLC channel, and logical channel, perform the RB or RLC bearer from the ingress link Or RLC channel or logical channel, RB or RLC bearer or RLC channel or logical channel mapping to egress link.
与QoS需求相关的标识信息可以为例如:终端的QoS流的标识(Qos flow identifier,简称QFI),终端的RB的标识,差分服务代码点(differentiated services code point,简称DSCP),互联网协议版本6(internet protocol version 6,简称IPv6)的IP数据包的包头中的流标签(flow label)等中的一种或多种。The identification information related to the QoS requirements may be, for example, the QoS flow identifier (QFI) of the terminal, the RB identifier of the terminal, the differentiated services code point (DSCP), Internet Protocol version 6 One or more of the flow label in the header of the IP data packet (internet protocol version 6, referred to as IPv6).
需要说明的是,具备这些能力的协议层的名称不一定为适配层,也可以为其它名称。本领域技术人员可以理解,只要具备这些能力的协议层均可以理解为本申请实施例中的适配层。It should be noted that the name of the protocol layer with these capabilities is not necessarily the adaptation layer, but may also be other names. Those skilled in the art can understand that any protocol layer with these capabilities can be understood as the adaptation layer in the embodiment of the application.
此外,本申请中还涉及到路由选择和承载映射。In addition, this application also involves routing and bearer mapping.
路由选择:用于为数据包选择下一跳节点。Route selection: used to select the next hop node for the data packet.
承载映射,也可以称为QoS映射。承载映射用于选择发送数据包的RLC承载或RLC信道或逻辑信道。Bearer mapping can also be called QoS mapping. The bearer mapping is used to select the RLC bearer or RLC channel or logical channel for sending data packets.
应理解,图1所示的一体化接入和回传系统中,一个IAB节点连接一个上级节点。但是在未来的中继系统中,为了提高无线回传链路的可靠性,一个IAB节点,如120,可以有多个上级节点同时为一个IAB节点提供服务,如图1中的IAB节点130还可以通过回传链路134连接到IAB节点120,即,IAB节点110和IAB节点120都视为IAB节点130的上级节点。IAB节点110,120,130的名称并不限制其所部署的场景或网络,可以是比如relay,RN等任何其他名称。在本申请中,IAB节点可以泛指任何具有中继功能的节点或设备,本申请中的IAB节点和中继节点的使用应理解具有相同的含义,本申请使用IAB节点仅是方便描述的需要。It should be understood that in the integrated access and backhaul system shown in FIG. 1, an IAB node is connected to an upper-level node. However, in the future relay system, in order to improve the reliability of the wireless backhaul link, an IAB node, such as 120, can have multiple upper-level nodes simultaneously providing services for an IAB node. The IAB node 130 in Figure 1 also It may be connected to the IAB node 120 through the backhaul link 134, that is, both the IAB node 110 and the IAB node 120 are regarded as the upper node of the IAB node 130. The names of the IAB nodes 110, 120, and 130 do not limit the scenarios or networks where they are deployed, and may be any other names such as relay, RN, and so on. In this application, an IAB node can generally refer to any node or device with a relay function. The use of IAB node and relay node in this application should be understood to have the same meaning, and the use of IAB node in this application is only for convenience of description. .
在图1中,无线链路102,112,122,132,113,123,133,134可以是双向链路,包括上行和下行传输链路,特别地,无线回传链路113,123,133,134可以用于上级节点为下级节点提供服务,如上级节点100为下级节点110提供无线回传服务。应理解,回传链路的上行和下行可以是分离的,即,上行链路和下行链路不是通过同一个节点进行传输的。所述下行传输是指上级节点,例如节点100,向下级节点,例如节点110,传输信息或数据,上行传输是指下级节点,例如节点110,向上级节点,例如节点100,传输信息或数据。所述节点不限于是网络节点还是终端设备,例如,在D2D场景下,终端设备可以充当中继节点为其他终端设备服务。无线回传链路在某些场景下又可以是接入链路,如节点110作为普通终端设备角色时,回传链路123对节点110来说也可以被视作接入链路,节点100作为普通终端设备角色时,回传链路113也是节点100的接入链路。应理解,上述上级节点可以是基站, 也可以是中继节点,下级节点可以是中继节点,也可以是具有中继功能的终端设备,例如D2D场景下,下级节点也可以是终端设备。In Figure 1, the wireless links 102, 112, 122, 132, 113, 123, 133, 134 can be bidirectional links, including uplink and downlink transmission links. In particular, the wireless backhaul links 113, 123, 133, 134 can be used by the upper node to provide services for the lower node, such as the upper node 100 is the lower node 110 provides wireless backhaul services. It should be understood that the uplink and downlink of the backhaul link may be separated, that is, the uplink and the downlink are not transmitted through the same node. The downlink transmission refers to an upper node, such as node 100, and a lower node, such as node 110, transmitting information or data, and the uplink transmission refers to a lower node, such as node 110, and an upper node, such as node 100, transmitting information or data. The node is not limited to whether it is a network node or a terminal device. For example, in a D2D scenario, the terminal device can act as a relay node to serve other terminal devices. The wireless backhaul link can also be an access link in some scenarios. For example, when the node 110 acts as an ordinary terminal device, the backhaul link 123 can also be regarded as an access link for the node 110, and the node 100 As an ordinary terminal device, the backhaul link 113 is also the access link of the node 100. It should be understood that the above-mentioned upper node may be a base station or a relay node, and the lower node may be a relay node or a terminal device with a relay function. For example, in a D2D scenario, the lower node may also be a terminal device.
在5G中,考虑到高频段的覆盖范围小,为了保障网络的覆盖性能,在IAB网络中可能采用多跳组网。考虑到业务传输可靠性的需求,可以使IAB节点支持双连接(dual connectivity,DC)或者多连接(multi-connectivity),以应对回传链路可能发生的异常情况。例如,链路的中断或阻塞(blockage)及负载波动等异常,提高传输的可靠性保障。因此,IAB网络支持多跳组网,还可以支持多连接组网。In 5G, considering the small coverage of high frequency bands, in order to ensure the coverage performance of the network, multi-hop networking may be adopted in the IAB network. Considering the requirement of service transmission reliability, the IAB node can be made to support dual connectivity (DC) or multi-connectivity to deal with possible abnormal situations in the backhaul link. For example, abnormalities such as link interruption or blockage and load fluctuations can improve the reliability of transmission. Therefore, the IAB network supports multi-hop networking and can also support multi-connection networking.
在由IAB节点服务的UE和IAB donor之间,存在至少一条由多段链路组成的传输路径。在一条传输路径上,包含多个节点,例如,UE,一个或多个IAB节点,IAB donor(若IAB donor为CU和DU分离的形态,则还包含Donor DU部分,和Donor CU部分)。There is at least one transmission path composed of multiple links between the UE served by the IAB node and the IAB donor. A transmission path includes multiple nodes, for example, UE, one or more IAB nodes, and IAB donor (if the IAB donor is in the form of separate CU and DU, it also includes the Donor DU part and the Donor CU part).
参见图7,图7是IAB系统的一个具体示例。如图7所示,IAB node 1的父节点为IAB donor,IAB node 1又为IAB node 2和IAB node 3的父节点,IAB node 2和IAB node 3均为IAB node4的父节点,IAB node 5的父节点为IAB node 3。UE的上行数据包可以经一个或多个IAB节点传输至宿主站点IAB donor后,再由IAB donor发送至移动网关设备(例如,5G核心网中的用户平面功能单元UPF)。UE的下行数据包将由IAB donor从移动网关设备处接收后,再通过IAB节点发送至UE。其中,UE1和宿主基站之间的数据传输有两条可用的路径。路径1:终端1→IAB节点4→IAB节点3→IAB节点1→宿主节点,以及终端1→IAB节点4→IAB节点2→IAB节点1→宿主节点。终端2和宿主节点之间数据包的传输有三条可用的路径,分别为:终端2→IAB节点4→IAB节点3→IAB节点1→宿主节点,终端2→IAB节点4→IAB节点2→IAB节点1→宿主节点,以及终端2→IAB节点5→IAB节点2→IAB节点1→宿主节点。Refer to Figure 7, which is a specific example of the IAB system. As shown in Figure 7, the parent node of IAB node 1 is IAB donor, IAB node 1 is the parent node of IAB node 2 and IAB node 3, IAB node 2 and IAB node 3 are both the parent nodes of IAB node 4, IAB node 5 The parent node of is IAB node 3. The uplink data packet of the UE may be transmitted to the host site IAB donor via one or more IAB nodes, and then sent by the IAB donor to the mobile gateway device (for example, the user plane function unit UPF in the 5G core network). The UE's downlink data packet will be received by the IAB donor from the mobile gateway device, and then sent to the UE through the IAB node. Among them, there are two available paths for data transmission between UE1 and the donor base station. Path 1: Terminal 1→IAB node 4→IAB node 3→IAB node 1→host node, and terminal 1→IAB node 4→IAB node 2→IAB node 1→host node. There are three available paths for data packet transmission between terminal 2 and host node, namely: terminal 2→IAB node 4→IAB node 3→IAB node 1→host node, terminal 2→IAB node 4→IAB node 2→IAB Node 1 → host node, and terminal 2 → IAB node 5 → IAB node 2 → IAB node 1 → host node.
应理解,图7所示的IAB组网场景仅仅是示例性的,在多跳和多连接结合的IAB场景中,还有更多其他的可能性,例如,图7中的IAB donor和另一IAB donor下的IAB node组成双连接为UE服务等,这里不一一列举。It should be understood that the IAB networking scenario shown in Figure 7 is only exemplary. In the IAB scenario where multi-hop and multi-connection are combined, there are more other possibilities, for example, the IAB donor in Figure 7 and another IAB nodes under the IAB donor form dual connections to serve the UE, etc., which are not listed here.
考虑到业务传输可靠性的需求,在UE支持双连接(dual connectivity,DC)或者载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)的场景中,均可以执行数据包的复制(duplication)操作。即在发送侧对待传输的数据包执行复制,得到两份相同的数据包。然后经由两条传输路径,将这两份相同的数据包发送给接收侧。下面结合图3进行说明。Considering the requirement of service transmission reliability, in scenarios where the UE supports dual connectivity (DC) or carrier aggregation (CA), data packet duplication (duplication) operations can be performed. That is, the data packet to be transmitted is copied on the sending side to obtain two identical data packets. Then, the two identical data packets are sent to the receiving side via two transmission paths. Description will be given below in conjunction with FIG. 3.
参见图8的(a)和(b),图8的(a)和(b)是UE支持数据包的复制操作的发送场景。图8的(a)为载波聚合(carrier aggregation,CA)场景。基站和UE之间可以将数据包映射两个不同的载波(component carrier,CC)上进行传输,从而支持数据包的复制操作。图8的(b)为双连接(dual connectivity,DC)场景。发送侧的数据包可以通过两个不同的路径到达接收侧。例如,以上行为例,一条路径是UE和主基站之间的直接链路,这条路径上服务UE的小区组为主小区组(master cell group,MCG)。另一条路径由UE-辅基站-主基站的两段链路组成,第二路径上辅基站服务UE的小区组为辅小区组(secondary cell group,SCG)。Referring to Fig. 8 (a) and (b), Fig. 8 (a) and (b) are sending scenarios in which the UE supports the copy operation of the data packet. Figure 8 (a) is a carrier aggregation (CA) scenario. The base station and the UE can map the data packet to two different component carriers (CC) for transmission, so as to support the data packet copy operation. Figure 8(b) is a dual connectivity (DC) scenario. Data packets on the sending side can reach the receiving side through two different paths. For example, in the above behavior example, one path is a direct link between the UE and the master base station, and the cell group serving the UE on this path is the master cell group (MCG). The other path is composed of two links of UE-secondary base station-primary base station. On the second path, the cell group served by the secondary base station for the UE is a secondary cell group (SCG).
参见图9,图9是IAB网络中支持UE执行数据包复制操作的场景的示例。如图9中的(a)所示,UE在接入链路可以执行基于CA的数据包复制操作。IAB 1和IAB2之间也支持CA,因此IAB2和IAB 1之间可以基于CA的方式支持UE执行数据包复制操作。Refer to FIG. 9, which is an example of a scenario in which a UE is supported to perform a data packet copy operation in an IAB network. As shown in (a) in Figure 9, the UE can perform a CA-based packet copy operation on the access link. CA is also supported between IAB1 and IAB2. Therefore, between IAB2 and IAB1, a CA-based manner can be used to support the UE to perform data packet copy operations.
或者,若回传链路的IAB节点支持多连接,则IAB节点还可以在回传链路基于DC的方式支持UE的duplication数据包的传输,例如图9的(b)。在图9的(b)中,IAB 2有两个父节点IAB 1和IAB 3,则IAB 2可以通过与两个父节点之间的两条链路传输UE的duplication数据包。Or, if the IAB node of the backhaul link supports multiple connections, the IAB node can also support the transmission of the duplication data packet of the UE in a DC-based manner on the backhaul link, for example, FIG. 9(b). In Figure 9(b), IAB 2 has two parent nodes IAB 1 and IAB 3, and IAB 2 can transmit the duplication data packet of the UE through two links between the two parent nodes.
再或者,IAB网络中还可能存在既不支持多连接,也不支持CA的回传链路。例如图9的(a)中,IAB 1和donor DU之间的回传链路,既不支持CA,也不支持多连接。Or, there may be backhaul links in the IAB network that neither support multiple connections nor CA. For example, in Figure 9(a), the backhaul link between IAB 1 and donor DU neither supports CA nor multiple connections.
应理解,本申请实施例中,支持UE执行数据包复制操作,也可以说,支持UE的duplication数据包的传输。It should be understood that, in the embodiments of the present application, the UE is supported to perform a data packet duplication operation. It can also be said that the transmission of duplication data packets of the UE is supported.
可替换地,本申请实施例中所述的UE的duplication数据包是指UE执行了duplication操作的数据包。UE的duplication数据包包括被执行duplication操作的数据包和其复制数据包,或者说被执行duplication操作的数据包及其副本。Alternatively, the duplication data packet of the UE described in the embodiment of the present application refers to a data packet in which the UE has performed a duplication operation. The duplication data packet of the UE includes the data packet subjected to the duplication operation and its duplicated data packet, or the data packet subjected to the duplication operation and its copy.
在另外一些场景下,UE的接入链路可能支持多连接,从而UE可以通过DC的方式支持数据包的duplication。而执行了复制操作的数据包,可以通过不同的回传链路传输,也可以在支持CA的公共回传链路上传输,还可能在不支持CA的公共回传链路上传输。In other scenarios, the access link of the UE may support multiple connections, so that the UE can support duplication of data packets in a DC manner. The data packets that have performed the copy operation can be transmitted through different backhaul links, can also be transmitted on a public backhaul link that supports CA, or may be transmitted on a public backhaul link that does not support CA.
针对上述场景,如果保证回传链路支持UE的无线承载的数据包复制传输功能,目前还没有方案支持。For the above scenario, if it is guaranteed that the backhaul link supports the data packet replication transmission function of the UE's radio bearer, there is currently no solution to support it.
下面说明本申请提供的技术方案。The technical solutions provided by this application are described below.
下文以宿主基站的CU-DU分离架构作为示例进行说明,可选地,如果宿主CU进一步为CP和UP分离架构,则宿主CU可替换为CU-CP。可选地,如果宿主基站为完整的功能实体,不进行CU和DU分离,则实施例中的宿主CU和/或宿主DU可以替换为宿主基站进行理解,也不需要宿主CU对宿主DU进行配置的过程。The following description takes the CU-DU separation architecture of the donor base station as an example. Optionally, if the host CU further has a CP and UP separation architecture, the host CU can be replaced with CU-CP. Optionally, if the donor base station is a complete functional entity and does not separate the CU and DU, the donor CU and/or the donor DU in the embodiment can be replaced with the donor base station for understanding, and the donor CU does not need to configure the donor DU the process of.
参见图10,图10是本申请提供的配置RLC承载的方法的示意性流程图。Refer to FIG. 10, which is a schematic flowchart of a method for configuring an RLC bearer provided by the present application.
图10中所述的宿主节点可以如图1中所示宿主节点100,第一节点如图1中所示的节点110,第二节点可以如图1中所示的节点120或节点130。The host node described in FIG. 10 may be the host node 100 shown in FIG. 1, the first node may be the node 110 shown in FIG. 1, and the second node may be the node 120 or the node 130 shown in FIG.
210、宿主CU向第一节点发送第一配置消息,第一节点从宿主CU接收第一配置消息。210. The host CU sends a first configuration message to the first node, and the first node receives the first configuration message from the host CU.
其中,第一配置消息用于指示第一节点配置第一节点和第二节点之间的第一RLC承载对。第一RLC承载对可用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包。这里,第一无线承载配置了数据包的复制传输。The first configuration message is used to instruct the first node to configure the first RLC bearer pair between the first node and the second node. The first RLC bearer pair may be used to transmit data packets of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device. Here, the first radio bearer is configured with data packet replication transmission.
可选的,第一节点为宿主DU,或者为中间IAB节点。Optionally, the first node is the host DU or an intermediate IAB node.
另外,第一节点为第二节点的父节点。也即,第二节点为第一节点的子节点。In addition, the first node is the parent node of the second node. That is, the second node is a child node of the first node.
本申请实施例中,第一RLC承载对是指第一节点和第二节点之间的由两个RLC承载组成的一组RLC承载。第一RLC承载对用于传输第一无线承载的数据包,第一无线承载支持数据包的复制传输,换句话说,也即第一RLC承载对包含的两个RLC承载用于传输来自第一无线承载的数据包及其复制数据包(或者,称为副本)。In the embodiment of the present application, the first RLC bearer pair refers to a group of RLC bearers formed by two RLC bearers between the first node and the second node. The first RLC bearer pair is used to transmit the data packet of the first radio bearer. The first radio bearer supports the duplication and transmission of the data packet. In other words, the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair are used to transmit data packets from the first radio bearer. Radio bearer data packets and their duplicate data packets (or, called duplicates).
应理解,第一无线承载支持数据包的复制传输,可以理解为第一无线承载配置了数据包的复制传输(的功能或者能力),或者第一无线承载具有数据包的复制传输(的功能或者能力),或者第一无线承载具有对数据包进行复制传输的能力。虽然第一无线承载具有对数据包进行复制传输的能力,但该复制传输的操作可以被激活或者去激活,在复制传输 操作处于激活(activation)的状态下,第一无线承载上的每个数据包都会复制为两份(或者多份)进行传输。而第一RLC承载对中包含的两个RLC承载中的一个RLC承载可以用于传输一个数据包,另一个RLC承载可以用于传输这个数据包的复制数据包。也即,第一RLC承载对中包含的两个RLC承载用于传输第一无线承载上两个相同的数据包。在复制传输操作处于去激活(deactivation)的状态,第一无线承载上的数据包不复制为两份(或者多份)进行传输,第一无线承载的数据包仍只传输一份,第一RLC承载对中的一个RLC承载可以传输第一无线承载上的数据包。It should be understood that the first radio bearer supports the replication transmission of data packets, which can be understood as the first radio bearer is configured with data packet replication transmission (function or capability), or the first radio bearer has data packet replication transmission (function or Capability), or the first radio bearer has the capability of copying and transmitting data packets. Although the first radio bearer has the ability to copy and transmit data packets, the copy transmission operation can be activated or deactivated. When the copy transmission operation is in the activation state, each data on the first radio bearer The package will be copied into two (or more) for transmission. One of the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair may be used to transmit a data packet, and the other RLC bearer may be used to transmit a duplicate data packet of this data packet. That is, the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair are used to transmit two identical data packets on the first radio bearer. When the copy transmission operation is in the deactivation state, the data packet on the first radio bearer is not copied into two (or more) copies for transmission, and only one data packet of the first radio bearer is still transmitted. The first RLC One RLC bearer in the bearer pair can transmit the data packet on the first radio bearer.
可选地,一个无线回传节点(IAB节点)在传输自己的业务时,该无线回传节点或者其MT部分可以被视为终端设备,因此,若该无线回传节点经由第一节点传输自己的业务数据或信令,则该无线回传节点也可被视为第一终端设备。Optionally, when a wireless backhaul node (IAB node) transmits its own services, the wireless backhaul node or its MT part can be regarded as a terminal device. Therefore, if the wireless backhaul node transmits itself via the first node The wireless backhaul node can also be regarded as the first terminal device.
需要说明的是,第一无线承载支持或者配置了数据包复制传输功能,表示第一无线承载具备这样的功能。可选地,第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能可以激活或者去激活。It should be noted that the first radio bearer supports or is configured with a data packet copy transmission function, which means that the first radio bearer has such a function. Optionally, the data packet copy transmission function of the first radio bearer can be activated or deactivated.
另外,本申请实施例中,RLC承载(RLC bearer)和RLC信道(RLC channel)以及逻辑信道(logical channel)之间具有一一对应的关系。换句话说,每一个RLC承载唯一对应一个RLC信道,同时也唯一对应一个逻辑信道。In addition, in the embodiments of the present application, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the RLC bearer (RLC bearer), the RLC channel (RLC channel), and the logical channel (logical channel). In other words, each RLC bearer uniquely corresponds to one RLC channel, and also uniquely corresponds to a logical channel.
因此,在各实施例中,RLC承载对(RLC bearer pair)也可以表述为RLC channel pair,或者logical channel pair,本申请对此不作限定。Therefore, in each embodiment, an RLC bearer pair (RLC bearer pair) may also be expressed as an RLC channel pair or a logical channel pair, which is not limited in this application.
可选地,在一些情况下,第一RLC承载对包含的两个RLC承载可能仅会使用其中一个RLC承载用于数据传输,这些情况下文再作详细说明。Optionally, in some cases, the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair may only use one of the RLC bearers for data transmission. These cases will be described in detail below.
以下,将第一RLC承载对中包含的两个RLC承载分别记作第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载。宿主CU具体可以通过如下方式指示第一节点配置第一RLC承载对。Hereinafter, the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair are respectively denoted as the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. Specifically, the donor CU may instruct the first node to configure the first RLC bearer pair in the following manner.
在一种实现方式中,第一配置消息中第一配置内容和第二配置内容。其中,第一配置内容用于指示第一RLC承载,第二配置内容用于配置第二RLC承载。In an implementation manner, the first configuration content and the second configuration content in the first configuration message. The first configuration content is used to indicate the first RLC bearer, and the second configuration content is used to configure the second RLC bearer.
可选地,第一配置内容和第二配置内容满足如下任意一种方式:Optionally, the first configuration content and the second configuration content satisfy any one of the following modes:
(1)第一配置内容中包含第一RLC承载的标识和第二RLC承载的标识,第二配置内容中包含第二RLC承载的标识和第一RLC承载的标识。(1) The first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the second configuration content includes the identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer.
在这种方式中,第一配置内容和第二配置内容中均包含第一RLC承载的标识和第二RLC承载的标识,表示第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载组成一个RLC承载对。In this manner, the first configuration content and the second configuration content both include the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, indicating that the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer form an RLC bearer pair.
(2)第一配置内容中包含第一RLC承载的标识和第一标识,第二配置内容中包含第二RLC承载的标识和第一标识。其中,第一标识用于关联第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载组成第一RLC承载对。(2) The first configuration content includes the identifier and the first identifier of the first RLC bearer, and the second configuration content includes the identifier and the first identifier of the second RLC bearer. The first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form a first RLC bearer pair.
在这种方式中,第一配置内容和第二配置内容除了各自包含一个RLC承载的标识之外,均包含一个共同的第一标识,表示通过第一标识将第一配置内容和第二配置内容中包含的RLC承载关联起来,组成一个RLC承载对。In this manner, the first configuration content and the second configuration content each include a common first identifier in addition to an RLC bearer identifier, which means that the first configuration content and the second configuration content are combined through the first identifier. The RLC bearers contained in are associated to form an RLC bearer pair.
可选地,第一标识可以为第一无线承载的标识(或者说,承载标识)。Optionally, the first identifier may be the identifier of the first radio bearer (or bearer identifier).
通过上述两种方式,宿主CU可以方便地向第一节点指示组成RLC承载对的两个承载,节约信令开销。Through the above two methods, the donor CU can conveniently indicate to the first node the two bearers forming the RLC bearer pair, saving signaling overhead.
可选地,第一配置消息中也可以不包含RLC承载的标识,宿主CU通过其它的方式指示第一节点配置第一RLC承载对,如下面的(3)所述。Optionally, the first configuration message may not include the RLC bearer identifier, and the donor CU instructs the first node to configure the first RLC bearer pair in other ways, as described in (3) below.
(3)第一配置消息中包含服务质量QoS信息和第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示第一节点根据QoS信息配置第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载,以组成第一RLC承载对。(3) The first configuration message contains quality of service QoS information and first indication information. The first indication information is used to instruct the first node to configure the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer according to the QoS information to form a first RLC bearer pair .
在这种实现方式中,第一配置消息中包含QoS信息和第一指示信息。第一节点根据第一指示信息,配置满足所述QoS信息所指示的QoS的两个RLC承载,从而组成第一RLC承载对。通过这种方式,宿主CU可以不指示第一RLC承载的标识和第二RLC承载的标识,第一节点可以根据QoS信息灵活地配置第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载。In this implementation manner, the first configuration message includes QoS information and first indication information. According to the first indication information, the first node configures two RLC bearers that meet the QoS indicated by the QoS information, thereby forming a first RLC bearer pair. In this way, the donor CU may not indicate the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the first node can flexibly configure the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer according to the QoS information.
(4)第一配置消息中包含可靠性参数。(4) The first configuration message includes reliability parameters.
在这种实现方式中,宿主CU通过隐式指示的方式指示第一节点配置第一RLC承载对。第一节点根据第一配置消息中包含的可靠性参数和预配置的门限进行比较,如果第一配置消息中包含的可靠性参数的指标和预配置的门限的比较结果符合需要配置两个RLC承载的条件,则配置两个RLC承载,组成一个RLC承载对。In this implementation manner, the donor CU instructs the first node to configure the first RLC bearer pair through an implicit indication. The first node compares the reliability parameter contained in the first configuration message with the pre-configured threshold, and if the comparison result between the reliability parameter index contained in the first configuration message and the pre-configured threshold meets the need to configure two RLC bearers If conditions are met, two RLC bearers are configured to form an RLC bearer pair.
例如,可靠性参数为丢包率,小于预设门限时,表明可靠性要求高,需要配置两个RLC承载。又例如,可靠性参数为可靠性指示,大于预设门限时,表明可靠性要求高,需要配置两个RLC承载。For example, the reliability parameter is the packet loss rate, and when it is less than the preset threshold, it indicates that the reliability requirement is high and two RLC bearers need to be configured. For another example, the reliability parameter is a reliability indicator, and when it is greater than the preset threshold, it indicates that the reliability requirement is high, and two RLC bearers need to be configured.
可选地,这里不限定可靠性参数具体是哪些参数。可以表征数据传输的可靠性的多种参数,例如,错误率、丢包率等,在本申请中都是适用的。Optionally, the reliability parameters are not limited here. Various parameters that can characterize the reliability of data transmission, such as error rate, packet loss rate, etc., are all applicable in this application.
通过这种方式,第一节点可以根据预配置的门限,灵活地配置第一RLC承载和/或第二RLC承载。In this way, the first node can flexibly configure the first RLC bearer and/or the second RLC bearer according to the pre-configured threshold.
可选地,第一配置消息中还可以携带回传类型指示。Optionally, the first configuration message may also carry a backhaul type indication.
其中,回传类型指示用于表明第一RLC承载和/或第二RLC承载被用于传输回传业务。对第一节点来说,回传业务指的是经由第一节点和其子节点(第二节点)之间的无线回传链路传输的终端的业务(包括数据和信令),区别于第二节点的接入业务。第二节点的接入业务是指将第二节点视为终端角色时传输的始于或终止于第二节点(或第二节点的MT部分)的自身业务(包括数据和信令)。在传输回传业务时,第一节点和第二节点之间可采用回传链路的协议栈进行通信,在传输第二节点的接入业务时,第一节点和第二节点之间可采用接入链路的协议栈进行通信。The indication of the backhaul type is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer and/or the second RLC bearer is used to transmit the backhaul service. For the first node, the backhaul service refers to the service (including data and signaling) of the terminal transmitted via the wireless backhaul link between the first node and its child node (second node), which is different from the first node. Access service of two nodes. The access service of the second node refers to the own service (including data and signaling) transmitted from or ending at the second node (or the MT part of the second node) when the second node is regarded as a terminal role. When transmitting backhaul services, the protocol stack of the backhaul link can be used for communication between the first node and the second node. When transmitting the access services of the second node, the first node and the second node can use The protocol stack of the access link communicates.
可选地,第一配置消息可以为无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)消息或者F1接口应用层协议(F1 application protocol,F1AP)消息。Optionally, the first configuration message may be a radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) message or an F1 interface application layer protocol (F1 application protocol, F1AP) message.
可选地,如果这里的第一节点为宿主DU,则第一配置消息中还可以包含一些信息中的一种或多种:能被映射到第一RLC承载对传输的UE的无线承载的承载标识、能被映射到第一RLC承载对传输的数据包中的QoS标签。Optionally, if the first node here is the donor DU, the first configuration message may also include one or more of some information: the bearer that can be mapped to the first RLC bearer to the UE's radio bearer for transmission The identifier can be mapped to the QoS label in the data packet transmitted by the first RLC bearer pair.
本申请实施例中,UE的无线承载的承载标识,可以由UE标识+无线承载(radio bearer,RB)标识(identifier,ID)组成,或者由GTP-U TEID+IP地址组成,还可以是其它形式,具体的标识形式不予限定。这里,TEID表示隧道端点标识(tunnel endpoint identifier)。In the embodiments of this application, the bearer identifier of the UE's radio bearer can be composed of UE ID + radio bearer (radio bearer, RB) identifier (identifier, ID), or GTP-U TEID + IP address, or other The form of the logo is not limited. Here, TEID represents the tunnel endpoint identifier (tunnel endpoint identifier).
另外,这里RB可以为信令无线承载(signaling radio bearer,SRB)或数据无线承载(data radio bearer,DRB)。In addition, the RB here may be a signaling radio bearer (signaling radio bearer, SRB) or a data radio bearer (data radio bearer, DRB).
另外,QoS标签可以指IP头中的差分服务代码点(differentiated services code point,DSCP)值、IPv6中的flow label、服务质量类标识(QoS class identifier,QCI)、5G服务质量指标(5G QoS identifier,5QI)等,本申请对此不作限定。In addition, the QoS label can refer to the differentiated services code point (DSCP) value in the IP header, the flow label in IPv6, the quality of service class identifier (QoS class identifier, QCI), and the 5G QoS identifier (5G QoS identifier). , 5QI), etc. This application is not limited.
第一节点根据第一配置消息配置第一节点和第二节点之间的第一RLC承载对,用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的相同的数据包(或者,第一无线承载的数据包及其副本)。可选的,数据包在回传链路上传输时,第一节点和/或第二节点需要执行路由选择来确定下一跳节点,并需要执行承载映射来确定用于传输数据包的RLC承载。第一节点和/或第二节点进行路由选择的配置和承载映射的配置将在下文中进行介绍。The first node configures the first RLC bearer pair between the first node and the second node according to the first configuration message, which is used to transmit the same data packet of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device (or the first radio bearer Data package and its copy). Optionally, when a data packet is transmitted on the backhaul link, the first node and/or the second node need to perform routing selection to determine the next hop node, and need to perform bearer mapping to determine the RLC bearer used to transmit the data packet . The configuration of the first node and/or the second node for routing and the configuration of bearer mapping will be introduced below.
第一节点根据第一配置消息,配置第一RLC承载对。完成配置之后,第一节点向宿主CU返回第一响应消息。The first node configures the first RLC bearer pair according to the first configuration message. After completing the configuration, the first node returns a first response message to the host CU.
220、第一节点向宿主CU发送第一响应消息。220. The first node sends a first response message to the host CU.
相应地,宿主CU从第一节点接收第一响应消息。Correspondingly, the host CU receives the first response message from the first node.
可选地,在一种实现方式中,第一响应消息中携带第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识和/或第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识。Optionally, in an implementation manner, the first response message carries the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and/or the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
这里,第一响应消息中携带第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识,可以用于宿主CU配置承载映射时使用。宿主CU可以使用逻辑信道的标识进行承载映射。Here, the first response message carries the identifiers of the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer, which can be used when the donor CU configures bearer mapping. The host CU can use the identifier of the logical channel to perform bearer mapping.
可选地,第一配置消息中还可以携带第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区(allowed serving cell)的信息。Optionally, the first configuration message may also carry information of the allowed serving cells (allowed serving cells) available for the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
可选地,第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区和第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区不同,这样可以提高传自第一无线承载的相同的数据包的传输的可靠性。。Optionally, the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer is different from the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, which can improve the reliability of the transmission of the same data packet transmitted from the first radio bearer . .
例如,第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道和第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道服务于两个不同的小区。又例如,第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道和第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道分别服务于两个不同的小区列表,其中,所述不同的小区列表中包含的小区无交集。For example, the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer serve two different cells. For another example, the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer respectively serve two different cell lists, wherein the cells contained in the different cell lists have no intersection.
可选地,第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道和第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区相同。Optionally, the available serving cells for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer are the same.
可选地,第一节点还可以在第一响应消息中携带第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第一RLC承载对中作为主路径(primary path)的RLC承载或逻辑信道。Optionally, the first node may also carry second indication information in the first response message, where the second indication information is used to indicate the RLC bearer or logical channel used as a primary path in the first RLC bearer pair.
应理解,作为主路径的RLC承载是指第一RLC承载对中包含的第一RLC承载或者第二RLC承载中的某一个。作为主路径的逻辑信道是指第一RLC承载对中包含的第一RLC承载或者第二RLC承载中的某一个所对应的逻辑信道。It should be understood that the RLC bearer as the primary path refers to one of the first RLC bearer or the second RLC bearer included in the first RLC bearer pair. The logical channel as the primary path refers to a logical channel corresponding to one of the first RLC bearer or the second RLC bearer included in the first RLC bearer pair.
进一步可选地,第一响应消息中还可以包括第一节点为第二节点(也即,第一节点的子节点)生成的用于第二节点配置和第一节点之间的RLC承载对的信元。Further optionally, the first response message may also include the RLC bearer pair generated by the first node for the second node (that is, the child node of the first node) for the RLC bearer pair between the second node configuration and the first node. Letter yuan.
在一种实现方式中,用于配置RLC承载对的信元可以为RLC-BearerConfig,第一响应消息可以携带RLC-BearerConfig信元或者RLC-BearerConfig中的内容,第二节点可以按照RLC-BearerConfig中的内容对RLC层以及逻辑信道进行配置。In an implementation manner, the information element used to configure the RLC bearer pair may be RLC-BearerConfig, the first response message may carry the RLC-BearerConfig information element or the content in the RLC-BearerConfig, and the second node may follow the RLC-BearerConfig The content configures the RLC layer and logical channels.
可选地,第一响应消息可以为RRC消息或者F1AP消息。Optionally, the first response message may be an RRC message or an F1AP message.
上述步骤210、220完成之后,宿主CU指示一个父节点执行与其其子节点之间的RLC承载对的配置,然后宿主CU可以指示该子节点进行和其父节点之间的RLC承载对应的配置。After the above steps 210 and 220 are completed, the host CU instructs a parent node to perform the configuration of the RLC bearer pair between its child nodes, and then the host CU may instruct the child node to perform the configuration corresponding to the RLC bearer between its parent nodes.
230、宿主CU向第二节点发送第二配置消息。230. The host CU sends a second configuration message to the second node.
相应地,第二节点从宿主CU接收第二配置消息。Correspondingly, the second node receives the second configuration message from the host CU.
可选的,第二节点为IAB节点,可以是接入IAB节点或者中间IAB节点。Optionally, the second node is an IAB node, which may be an access IAB node or an intermediate IAB node.
和第一配置消息类似,第二配置消息中也包含指示第二节点配置第一RLC承载对的配置内容。第一RLC承载对可用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包。Similar to the first configuration message, the second configuration message also contains configuration content instructing the second node to configure the first RLC bearer pair. The first RLC bearer pair may be used to transmit data packets of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device.
在一种实现方式中,第二配置消息中包含第三配置内容和第四配置内容,其中,第三配置内容用于配置第一RLC承载对中的第一RLC承载,第四配置内容用于配置第一RLC承载对中的第二RLC承载。In an implementation manner, the second configuration message contains third configuration content and fourth configuration content, where the third configuration content is used to configure the first RLC bearer in the first RLC bearer pair, and the fourth configuration content is used to Configure the second RLC bearer in the first RLC bearer pair.
可选的,第三配置内容中,包含第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道(logical channel,LCH)的逻辑信道标识(logical channel identifier,LCID),第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的可用的服务小区信息,以及对第一RLC承载所对应的RLC实体及逻辑信道的配置内容。Optionally, the third configuration content includes the logical channel identifier (LCID) of the logical channel (logical channel, LCH) corresponding to the first RLC bearer, and the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer Information, and the configuration content of the RLC entity and logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer.
可选的,第四配置内容中,包含第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道(logical channel,LCH)的逻辑信道标识(logical channel identifier,LCID),第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的可用的服务小区信息,以及对第二RLC承载所对应的RLC实体及逻辑信道的配置内容。Optionally, the fourth configuration content includes the logical channel identifier (LCID) of the logical channel (logical channel, LCH) corresponding to the second RLC bearer, and the available serving cell of the second RLC bearer corresponding logical channel Information, and the configuration content of the RLC entity and logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
可选地,第三配置内容和第四配置内容也满足如下任意一种方式。Optionally, the third configuration content and the fourth configuration content also satisfy any of the following modes.
(1)第三配置内容中包含第一RLC承载的标识和第二RLC承载的标识,第四配置内容中包含第二RLC承载的标识和第一RLC承载的标识。(1) The third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the fourth configuration content includes the identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer.
(2)第三配置内容中包含第一RLC承载的标识和第一标识,第四配置内容中包含第二RLC承载的标识和第一标识。其中,第一标识用于关联第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载组成第一RLC承载对。(2) The third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the first identity, and the fourth configuration content includes the identity of the second RLC bearer and the first identity. The first identifier is used to associate the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form a first RLC bearer pair.
(3)第二配置消息中包含可靠性参数。(3) The second configuration message includes reliability parameters.
这里,方式(1)-(3)中对于第三配置内容和第四配置内容的说明可以参考步骤210中对第一配置内容和第二配置内容的说明,不再赘述。Here, the description of the third configuration content and the fourth configuration content in the manners (1)-(3) can refer to the description of the first configuration content and the second configuration content in step 210, and will not be repeated.
可选地,第二配置消息中携带第一标识。第一标识可以为第一无线承载的承载标识。Optionally, the second configuration message carries the first identifier. The first identifier may be a bearer identifier of the first radio bearer.
可选地,第二配置消息中携带第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示第一RLC承载对中作为主路径的RLC承载。例如,在第三配置内容中携带第三指示信息。Optionally, the second configuration message carries third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate the RLC bearer serving as the primary path in the first RLC bearer pair. For example, the third indication information is carried in the third configuration content.
如上文所述,第一节点返回给宿主CU的第一响应消息中可以携带第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示第一RLC承载对中作为主路径的RLC承载。而宿主CU可以将第一响应消息中指定的主路径的指示给第一节点的子节点(也即,第二节点)。这样,第二节点也可以在一些情况下,仅通过第一RLC承载对中作为主路径的RLC承载向其父节点传输第一无线承载的数据包。As described above, the first response message returned by the first node to the donor CU may carry second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate the RLC bearer of the first RLC bearer pair as the primary path. The host CU may indicate the main path specified in the first response message to the child node of the first node (that is, the second node). In this way, the second node may also transmit the data packet of the first radio bearer to its parent node only through the RLC bearer in the first RLC bearer pair as the main path in some cases.
在一种可能的实现中,如果第二节点的待发送的上行数据包的数量较少,例如,可经由第一RLC承载对传输的上行数据包的数据量低于某一个预设阈值,第二节点则可以仅通过第一RLC承载对中的主路径向第一节点发送数据包。该预设阈值可以由宿主CU配置,例如,包含在第二配置消息中发送给第二节点。In a possible implementation, if the number of uplink data packets to be sent by the second node is small, for example, the data volume of the uplink data packets that can be transmitted via the first RLC bearer pair is lower than a certain preset threshold. The second node may send the data packet to the first node only through the main path in the first RLC bearer pair. The preset threshold may be configured by the host CU, for example, included in the second configuration message and sent to the second node.
在另一种可能的实现中,如果第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能被去激活,第二节点可以仅通过第一RLC承载对中的主路径向第一节点发送第一无线承载的数据包。In another possible implementation, if the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device is deactivated, the second node may only send the first node to the first node through the main path of the first RLC bearer pair. A data packet carried by a radio.
关于第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活和去激活,下文会作详细说明。The activation and deactivation of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer will be described in detail below.
在另一种可能的实现中,如果第二节点不需要将UE的数据包映射到两个RLC承载上传输,则第二节点仅通过第一RLC承载中的主路径向第一节点发送数据包。In another possible implementation, if the second node does not need to map the UE's data packet to two RLC bearers for transmission, the second node only sends the data packet to the first node through the primary path in the first RLC bearer .
可选地,第二配置消息中包含第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道和第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的信息。例如,第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的信息可以携带在第三配置内容中,第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的信息可以携带在第四配置内容中。Optionally, the second configuration message includes the information of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer. For example, the information of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer may be carried in the third configuration content, and the information of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer may be carried in the fourth configuration content.
可选地,第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道和第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的可用服务小区不同。例如,第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道和第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道服务于不同的小区,或者服务于不同的小区列表,或者第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载属于不同的小区组,对应于不同的小区组标识。进一步可选地,所述不同的小区列表或小区组中包含的小区无交集。Optionally, the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logical channels corresponding to the second RLC bearer have different available serving cells. For example, the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer serve different cells or serve different cell lists, or the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer belong to different cell groups, corresponding to For different cell group identification. Further optionally, the cells included in the different cell lists or cell groups have no intersection.
可选地,第二配置消息中还可以携带其它信息。Optionally, the second configuration message may also carry other information.
例如,第二配置消息中还可以包括数据量的门限值,该门限值用于第二节点进行上行传输的分流决策。例如,根据映射规则,有些上行数据包既可以被映射到第一RLC对中的一个RLC承载上传输,第二节点可以根据该门限值,在这些上行数据包的数据量不超过门限值的情况下,则仅通过第三指示信息所指定的作为主路径的RLC承载来传输上行数据包,否则可通过第一RLC承载对包含的两个RLC承载来传输这些上行数据包。For example, the second configuration message may also include a threshold value for the amount of data, and the threshold value is used for the offload decision of the second node for uplink transmission. For example, according to the mapping rules, some uplink data packets can be mapped to one of the RLC bearers in the first RLC pair for transmission, and the second node can use the threshold value in which the data volume of these uplink data packets does not exceed the threshold value. In the case of, only the RLC bearer specified by the third indication information as the primary path is used to transmit the uplink data packets; otherwise, these uplink data packets may be transmitted through the two RLC bearers included in the first RLC bearer pair.
又例如,第二配置消息中还可以携带以下信息中的一种或多种:回传类型指示、回传链路的RLC承载的标识、用于对RLC层进行配置的信元(例如,可以为RLC-Config)、用于对逻辑信道进行配置的信元(例如,LogicalChannelConfig)等。For another example, the second configuration message may also carry one or more of the following information: indication of the backhaul type, the identifier of the RLC bearer of the backhaul link, and the information element used to configure the RLC layer (for example, RLC-Config), cells used to configure logical channels (for example, LogicalChannelConfig), etc.
其中,回传类型指示用于表明第一RLC承载和/或第二RLC承载被用于传输回传业务。对第二节点来说,回传业务指的是经由第二节点和第二节点的父节点之间的无线回传链路传输的终端的业务(包括数据和信令),区别于第二节点的接入业务。第二节点的接入业务是指将第二节点视为终端角色时传输的始于或终止于第二节点(或第二节点的MT部分)的自身业务(包括数据和信令)。在传输回传业务时,第二节点和父节点之间可采用回传链路的协议栈进行通信,在传输第二节点的接入业务时,第二节点和父节点之间可采用接入链路的协议栈进行通信。The indication of the backhaul type is used to indicate that the first RLC bearer and/or the second RLC bearer is used to transmit the backhaul service. For the second node, the backhaul service refers to the service (including data and signaling) of the terminal transmitted via the wireless backhaul link between the second node and the parent node of the second node, which is different from the second node Access business. The access service of the second node refers to the own service (including data and signaling) transmitted from or ending at the second node (or the MT part of the second node) when the second node is regarded as a terminal role. When transmitting backhaul services, the second node and the parent node can use the protocol stack of the backhaul link for communication. When transmitting the access services of the second node, the second node and the parent node can use access The protocol stack of the link communicates.
可选地,如果这里的第二节点为中间IAB节点,第二配置消息中还可以包括如下信息中的一种或多种:能被映射到第一RLC承载对传输的UE的无线承载的承载标识、上行传输过程中能被映射到第一RLC承载上传输的上一跳链路的RLC承载的标识、上行传输过程中能被映射到第二RLC承载上传输的上一跳链路的RLC承载的标识、下行传输过程中第一RLC承载上传输的数据包可被映射至的下一跳链路RLC承载的标识、下行传输过程中第二RLC承载上传输的数据包可被映射至的下一跳链路RLC承载的标识。Optionally, if the second node here is an intermediate IAB node, the second configuration message may also include one or more of the following information: the bearer that can be mapped to the first RLC bearer to the UE's radio bearer for transmission Identifier, the identifier of the RLC bearer that can be mapped to the last hop link transmitted on the first RLC bearer during uplink transmission, and the RLC that can be mapped to the last hop link transmitted on the second RLC bearer during uplink transmission The identity of the bearer, the identity of the next hop link RLC bearer to which the data packet transmitted on the first RLC bearer can be mapped during the downlink transmission, and the identity of the data packet transmitted on the second RLC bearer during the downlink transmission can be mapped to The identifier of the RLC bearer on the next hop link.
可选地,如果这里的第二节点为接入IAB节点,第二配置消息中还可以包含以下信息中的一种或多种:能被映射到第一RLC承载对传输的UE的无线承载的承载标识、能被映射到第一RLC承载对传输的数据包中的QoS标签、能被映射到第二RLC承载传输的数据包中的QoS标签、能被映射到第一RLC承载传输的GTP TEID或GTP TEID+IP地址、能被映射到第二RLC承载传输的GTP TEID或GTP TEID+IP地址。Optionally, if the second node here is an access IAB node, the second configuration message may also include one or more of the following information: the radio bearer that can be mapped to the first RLC bearer to the UE transmitting Bearer identification, QoS label that can be mapped to the data packet transmitted by the first RLC bearer pair, QoS label that can be mapped to the data packet transmitted by the second RLC bearer, and GTP TEID that can be mapped to the first RLC bearer transmission Or GTP TEID+IP address, which can be mapped to GTP TEID or GTP TEID+IP address transmitted by the second RLC bearer.
可选地,UE的无线承载的承载标识,可以由UE标识+RB ID组成,或者由GTP-U TEID+IP地址组成,还可以是其它形式,无线承载RB可以为SRB或DRB。Optionally, the bearer identity of the radio bearer of the UE may be composed of UE identity + RB ID, or GTP-U TEID + IP address, or other forms, and the radio bearer RB may be SRB or DRB.
QoS标签可以指IP头中的DSCP值、IPv6中的流标签flow label、QCI、5QI等。The QoS label can refer to the DSCP value in the IP header, flow label, QCI, 5QI, etc. in IPv6.
第二节点根据第二配置消息完成和第一节点之间的第一RLC承载对的配置之后,向第宿主CU发送第二响应消息。After the second node completes the configuration of the first RLC bearer pair with the first node according to the second configuration message, it sends a second response message to the first donor CU.
240、第二节点向宿主CU发送第二响应消息。240. The second node sends a second response message to the host CU.
相应地,宿主CU从第二节点接收第二响应消息。Correspondingly, the host CU receives the second response message from the second node.
其中,第二响应消息可用于向宿主CU反馈第二节点对第二节点和其父节点之间的第一RLC承载对的配置情况。The second response message may be used to feed back to the host CU the configuration of the first RLC bearer pair between the second node and the parent node.
可选地,第二响应消息可以为RRC消息或者F1AP消息。Optionally, the second response message may be an RRC message or an F1AP message.
以上以配置两个IAB节点之间的RLC承载对为例,对RLC承载对的配置过程进行了详细说明。可以理解的是,在IAB网络中存在多跳的场景下,对于支持终端设备无线承载传输的回传链路上的每一个IAB节点,都需要配置和父节点之间的RLC承载对,还需要配置和子节点之间的RLC承载对。其中,一个IAB节点在面向父节点时,其可以看作是该父节点的子节点,该IAB节点配置和其父节点之间的RLC承载对的过程可以参考上述第二节点的配置行为。当该IAB节点在面向子节点时,其可以看作是该子节点的父节点,该IAB节点配置和其子节点之间的RLC承载对的过程可以参考上述第一节点的配置行为。The above takes the configuration of the RLC bearer pair between two IAB nodes as an example to describe the configuration process of the RLC bearer pair in detail. It is understandable that in the multi-hop scenario in the IAB network, for each IAB node on the backhaul link that supports the wireless bearer transmission of the terminal device, it is necessary to configure the RLC bearer pair with the parent node, and also need Configure the RLC bearer pair with the child node. When an IAB node faces the parent node, it can be regarded as a child node of the parent node. The process of configuring the RLC bearer pair between the IAB node and its parent node can refer to the configuration behavior of the second node. When the IAB node faces a child node, it can be regarded as the parent node of the child node. The process of configuring the RLC bearer pair between the IAB node and its child nodes can refer to the configuration behavior of the first node.
本申请的技术方案,通过针对回传链路配置RLC承载对,可以使回传链路支持UE的无线承载的数据包的复制操作,提高了回传链路的数据传输的可靠性。In the technical solution of the present application, by configuring the RLC bearer pair for the backhaul link, the backhaul link can support the duplication operation of the data packet of the radio bearer of the UE, which improves the reliability of the data transmission of the backhaul link.
在完成对回传链路的RLC承载对的配置之后,也可以根据实际的数据传输情况更新对该回传链路的RLC承载对配置。After completing the configuration of the RLC bearer pair on the backhaul link, the RLC bearer pair configuration on the backhaul link may also be updated according to the actual data transmission situation.
下面对更新回传链路的RLC承载对的配置的过程进行说明。The following describes the process of updating the configuration of the RLC bearer pair of the backhaul link.
以上文中的第一终端设备的第一无线承载为例,如果第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能被去激活,则第一终端设备到宿主节点之间的回传链路上配置的RLC承载对中的两个RLC承载所对应的逻辑信道的可用服务小区的限制可以被取消。而如果终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能被激活,则第一终端设备到宿主节点之间的回传链路上配置的RLC承载对中的两个RLC承载所对应的逻辑信道的可用服务小区的限制可以被启用。因此,UE的无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态需要被宿主DU和/或回传链路上的IAB节点获知。In the above text, the first radio bearer of the first terminal device is taken as an example. If the data packet copy transmission function of the first terminal device of the first terminal device is deactivated, the backhaul link between the first terminal device and the host node The restriction on the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers in the configured RLC bearer pair can be cancelled. If the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer of the terminal device is activated, the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers in the RLC bearer pair configured on the backhaul link between the first terminal device and the host node The limitation of available serving cells can be enabled. Therefore, the active status of the data packet replication transmission function of the radio bearer of the UE needs to be known by the host DU and/or the IAB node on the backhaul link.
可选的,若一个逻辑信道的可用服务小区的限制被取消,则该逻辑信道可以用其所对应的小区组中的任意一个小区。例如,逻辑信道1是第一节点为第二节点所分配的,第一节点为第二节点提供服务的小区组被称为小区组1,在小区组1中包含小区1,小区2,小区3,小区4,在对第二节点的逻辑信道1进行配置时,逻辑信道1的可用服务小区包含小区1和小区2,则当逻辑信道1的可用服务小区的限制被取消时,逻辑信道1可以用小区组1中的任意一个小区,即小区1、小区2、小区3、小区4中的任意一个。Optionally, if the limitation of the available serving cells of a logical channel is cancelled, the logical channel can use any cell in the cell group corresponding to the logical channel. For example, logical channel 1 is allocated by the first node to the second node, and the cell group served by the first node for the second node is called cell group 1. Cell group 1 includes cell 1, cell 2, and cell 3. , Cell 4, when configuring logical channel 1 of the second node, the available serving cells of logical channel 1 include cell 1 and cell 2, then when the restriction on the available serving cells of logical channel 1 is cancelled, logical channel 1 can Use any cell in the cell group 1, that is, any one of cell 1, cell 2, cell 3, and cell 4.
可选的,当终端设备的第一无线承载的复制操作被去激活,或者回传链路上配置的RLC承载对中的两个RLC承载所对应的逻辑信道的可用服务小区的限制被取消时,则在回传链路上,可以仅通过RLC承载对中作为主路径的RLC承载传输终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包。当终端设备的第一无线承载的复制操作被激活,或者回传链路上配置的RLC承载对中的两个RLC承载所对应的逻辑信道的可用服务小区的限制被启用时,则在回传链路上,需要通过RLC承载对中的两个RLC承载传输终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包。Optionally, when the duplication operation of the first radio bearer of the terminal device is deactivated, or the restriction on the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers in the pair of RLC bearers configured on the backhaul link is cancelled , Then on the backhaul link, the data packet of the first radio bearer of the terminal device may be transmitted only through the RLC bearer of the RLC bearer pair as the main path. When the replication operation of the first radio bearer of the terminal device is activated, or the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers in the RLC bearer pair configured on the backhaul link is activated, the backhaul On the link, the data packet of the first radio bearer of the terminal device needs to be transmitted through the two RLC bearers in the RLC bearer pair.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,激活状态包括激活和去激活两种状态。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the activation state includes two states: activation and deactivation.
本申请针对更新回传链路的RLC承载对的配置提供如下几种实现方式。This application provides the following implementation methods for the configuration of the RLC bearer pair updating the backhaul link.
方式0Way 0
在宿主CU发送给第二节点的第二配置消息中,若包含了第二节点和第一节点之间的无线回传链路上的RLC承载对中每一个RLC承载对应逻辑信道的可用服务小区,则第二节点默认为RLC承载对中的两个RLC承载所对应的逻辑信道的可用服务小区的限制被启用。In the second configuration message sent by the donor CU to the second node, if the RLC bearer pair on the wireless backhaul link between the second node and the first node is included, the available serving cell of each RLC bearer corresponding to the logical channel , The second node defaults that the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers in the RLC bearer pair is enabled.
可选地,第二节点可以为接入IAB节点,或者中间IAB节点,第一节点为第二节点的父节点。Optionally, the second node may be an access IAB node or an intermediate IAB node, and the first node is a parent node of the second node.
方式1 Way 1
宿主CU确定第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态。The host CU determines the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device.
可选的,宿主CU在发送给第一终端设备的第一无线承载的配置信息中,指示第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态。Optionally, the host CU indicates the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer in the configuration information of the first radio bearer sent to the first terminal device.
在一种情况下,第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态为激活,则宿主CU向第二节点发送第一通知消息,第一通知消息具体用于指示第二节点启用第二节点和第一节点之间的回传链路上的RLC承载对包含的两个RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。In one case, if the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer is activated, the host CU sends a first notification message to the second node, and the first notification message is specifically used to instruct the second node to enable the second node The RLC bearer on the backhaul link between the first node and the first node limits the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two included RLC bearers.
可选地,第二节点可以为接入IAB节点,或者中间IAB节点,第一节点为第二节点的父节点。Optionally, the second node may be an access IAB node or an intermediate IAB node, and the first node is a parent node of the second node.
相反,在另一种情况下,第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态为去激活,则宿主CU向第二节点发送第一通知消息,第一通知消息具体用于指示第二节点取消第二节点和第一节点之间的回传链路上的RLC承载对包含的两个RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。On the contrary, in another case, the active state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer is deactivated, the host CU sends a first notification message to the second node, and the first notification message is specifically used to instruct the second node The restriction of the RLC bearer on the backhaul link between the second node and the first node on the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two contained RLC bearers is cancelled.
可选地,第一通知消息可以为RRC消息或者F1AP消息,这里不作限定。Optionally, the first notification message may be an RRC message or an F1AP message, which is not limited here.
在另一种可能的实现中,宿主CU向第一节点发送第二通知消息,第二通知消息用于指示第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态为激活,可选的,第一节点获取到第二通知消息之后,向其子节点(即第二节点)发送第三通知消息,第三通知消息用于向第二节点指示启用第二节点和第一节点之间的回传链路上的RLC承载对包含的两个RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制;或者,宿主CU向第一节点发送第二通知消息,第二通知消息用于指示第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态为去激活,可选的,第一节点获取到第二通知消息之后,向其子节点(即第二节点)发送第三通知消息,第三通知消息用于向第二节点指示取消第二节点和第一节点之间的回传链路上的RLC承载对包含的两个RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。In another possible implementation, the host CU sends a second notification message to the first node. The second notification message is used to indicate that the activation state of the packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer is activated. Optionally, the first After the node obtains the second notification message, it sends a third notification message to its child node (ie, the second node). The third notification message is used to instruct the second node to enable the backhaul chain between the second node and the first node. The RLC bearer on the road restricts the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers; or, the donor CU sends a second notification message to the first node, and the second notification message is used to indicate the status of the first radio bearer The activation state of the data packet replication transmission function is deactivated. Optionally, after the first node obtains the second notification message, it sends a third notification message to its child node (ie, the second node). The third notification message is used to The second node instructs to cancel the restriction of the RLC bearer on the backhaul link between the second node and the first node on the available serving cells of the logical channels corresponding to the two contained RLC bearers.
可选地,第二通知消息可以为RRC消息或者F1AP消息,这里不作限定。Optionally, the second notification message may be an RRC message or an F1AP message, which is not limited here.
可选地,第三通知消息可以包含在媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)层的控制元素(control element,CE)中向第二节点发送。Optionally, the third notification message may be included in a control element (CE) of a media access control (MAC) layer and sent to the second node.
方式2 Way 2
服务于第一终端设备的接入IAB节点确定第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态,并通知宿主CU,再由宿主CU向第二节点发送第一通知消息, 或者由宿主CU向第一节点发送第二通知消息,第一节点可以向第二节点发送第三通知消息。The access IAB node serving the first terminal device determines the activation status of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device, and informs the host CU, and the host CU sends a first notification message to the second node, Or the host CU sends the second notification message to the first node, and the first node may send the third notification message to the second node.
宿主CU向第二节点发送第一通知消息、宿主CU向第一节点发送第二通知消息、第一节点向第二节点发送第三通知消息可参考更新回传链路的RLC承载对的配置的方式1中的描述进行理解。If the donor CU sends the first notification message to the second node, the donor CU sends the second notification message to the first node, and the first node sends the third notification message to the second node, please refer to the configuration of updating the RLC bearer pair of the backhaul link. Understand the description in Mode 1.
通过以上方式0-方式2中的任意一种方式,可以实现回传链路的RLC承载对的配置的灵活开启或取消。Through any of the above methods 0 to 2, the configuration of the RLC bearer pair of the backhaul link can be flexibly opened or cancelled.
在上文对第二配置消息的说明中,第二配置消息中可能携带第三指示信,第三指示信息用于指示第一RLC承载对中作为主路径的RLC承载。第二节点在获取到第三指示信息之后,如果第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能去激活,则第二节点仅通过第三指示信息所指定的主路径向第一节点传输第一无线承载的数据包。In the above description of the second configuration message, the second configuration message may carry a third indication message, and the third indication information is used to indicate the RLC bearer in the first RLC bearer pair as the primary path. After the second node obtains the third indication information, if the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer is deactivated, the second node only transmits the first radio bearer to the first node through the main path specified by the third indication information Packets.
结合这里对回传链路的RLC承载对的配置的说明可以知道,如果第二节点从宿主CU接收到具体用于指示取消第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制的第一通知消息,或者,第二节点从第一节点接收到具体用于指示取消第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制的第三通知消息,第二节点就仅通过被指定为主路径的RLC承载传输第一无线承载的数据包。In conjunction with the description of the configuration of the RLC bearer pair of the backhaul link here, it can be known that if the second node receives from the donor CU, it is specifically used to instruct the cancellation of the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer’s respective corresponding logical channel available serving cell Or, the second node receives from the first node a third notification message specifically used to instruct to cancel the restriction of the serving cells available for the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer, The second node only transmits the data packet of the first radio bearer through the RLC bearer designated as the primary path.
下文对承载映射的配置过程以及路由选择的配置过程分别进行说明。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中,还可以存在其他适用的承载映射的配置过程,或者其他适用的路由选择的配置过程,本申请实施例不做限定。The configuration process of bearer mapping and the configuration process of routing are respectively described below. It should be noted that in the embodiments of the present application, there may also be other applicable bearer mapping configuration procedures, or other applicable routing configuration procedures, which are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
可选地,指示承载映射的配置的信息可以携带在步骤210中的第一配置消息中发送给第一节点,或者携带在步骤230中的第二配置消息中发送给第二节点,或者也可以单独发送给第一节点和/或第二节点,本申请中不作限定。Optionally, the information indicating the configuration of the bearer mapping can be carried in the first configuration message in step 210 and sent to the first node, or carried in the second configuration message in step 230 and sent to the second node, or it can be It is sent separately to the first node and/or the second node, which is not limited in this application.
本申请提供多种承载映射的方式,下文以第一终端设备的第一无线承载作为示例分别进行说明。This application provides a variety of bearer mapping methods, and the following uses the first radio bearer of the first terminal device as an example for description.
方式1 Way 1
将第一终端设备的第一无线承载映射到出口链路的RLC承载。Map the first radio bearer of the first terminal device to the RLC bearer of the egress link.
这里,方式1对于所有的IAB节点(即,接入IAB节点和中间IAB节点)以及宿主DU都是适用的。Here, method 1 is applicable to all IAB nodes (that is, access IAB nodes and intermediate IAB nodes) and the host DU.
方式2 Way 2
根据接收到的数据包中携带的QoS标签映射到出口链路的RLC承载。Map to the RLC bearer of the egress link according to the QoS label carried in the received data packet.
这里,方式2对于接入IAB节点和宿主DU是适用的。Here, method 2 is applicable to access IAB nodes and host DU.
方式3 Way 3
从入口链路的RLC承载映射到出口链路的RLC承载。The RLC bearer of the ingress link is mapped to the RLC bearer of the egress link.
其中,方式3对于所有的IAB节点都是适用的。Among them, method 3 is applicable to all IAB nodes.
方式4Way 4
从数据包中携带的GTP-U TEID或者GTP-U TEID+IP地址映射到出口链路的RLC承载。The GTP-U TEID or GTP-U TEID+IP address carried in the data packet is mapped to the RLC bearer of the egress link.
这里,方式4对于接入IAB节点和宿主DU是适用的。Here, method 4 is applicable to access IAB nodes and host DU.
下面针对接入IAB节点、中间IAB和宿主DU分别进行说明。The following separately describes the access IAB node, the intermediate IAB and the host DU.
(1)接入IAB节点(1) Access to IAB node
对于接入IAB节点来说,由于是配置回传链路的承载映射,所以只涉及上行传输。For the access IAB node, because the bearer mapping of the backhaul link is configured, only uplink transmission is involved.
在上行传输中,由于回传链路支持数据包的复制传输,因而UE的duplication数据需要被映射到两个不同的RLC承载上进行传输。In uplink transmission, since the backhaul link supports duplication and transmission of data packets, the duplication data of the UE needs to be mapped to two different RLC bearers for transmission.
因此,对于配置了支持数据包的复制传输功能(例如,基于CA方式的数据包复制)且数据包复制传输功能被激活的UE的无线承载(例如记作RB1),接入IAB节点将从两个不同的逻辑信道(分别记作LCH1,LCH2)上接收到UE的RB1的数据包,接入IAB节点需要将从LCH1,LCH2上接收到的数据包映射到两个不同出口链路的RLC承载上向父节点传输。例如,接入IAB节点将从LCH1和LCH2上接收到的RB1的数据包分别映射到出口链路1的RLC承载和出口链路2的RLC承载上进行传输。Therefore, for the radio bearer (for example, denoted as RB1) of the UE configured to support the data packet replication transmission function (for example, CA-based data packet replication) and the data packet replication transmission function is activated, the access IAB node will be from two Two different logical channels (denoted as LCH1, LCH2, respectively) receive the UE's RB1 data packet, and access to the IAB node needs to map the data packet received from LCH1, LCH2 to the RLC bearer of two different egress links Upward transmission to the parent node. For example, the access IAB node maps the data packets of RB1 received from LCH1 and LCH2 to the RLC bearer of egress link 1 and the RLC bearer of egress link 2 for transmission.
接入IAB节点进行上行承载映射的配置时,若UE的无线承载支持数据包的复制传输且复制传输功能处于激活(activation)的状态,接入IAB节点从两个不同的逻辑信道上接收到的UE的无线承载的数据包,将被分别映射到两个不同出口链路的RLC承载上向父节点传输。可选的,接入IAB节点还需要配置这两个不同出口链路的RLC承载服务的小区。可选地,这两个不同出口链路的RLC承载服务于不同的小区或不同的小区列表或不同的小区组(cell group)。When accessing the IAB node for uplink bearer mapping configuration, if the UE’s radio bearer supports the replication transmission of data packets and the replication transmission function is activated, the access IAB node receives from two different logical channels The data packets of the radio bearer of the UE will be respectively mapped to the RLC bearers of two different egress links and transmitted to the parent node. Optionally, access to the IAB node also needs to configure the cells served by the RLC bearer of the two different egress links. Optionally, the RLC bearers of the two different egress links serve different cells or different cell lists or different cell groups.
可选地,接入IAB节点可以有多种具体的映射方式,这些映射方式的配置可以是由宿主CU发送给接入IAB节点的,或者可以是由接入IAB节点自行决定的。Optionally, there may be multiple specific mapping modes for accessing the IAB node, and the configuration of these mapping modes may be sent by the host CU to the accessing IAB node, or may be determined by the accessing IAB node.
例如,接入IAB节点将对应于某个UE的同一个无线承载对应的两个不同的入口链路的RLC承载或逻辑信道的数据,分别指定映射到两个不同出口链路的RLC承载上进行传输。For example, the access IAB node assigns the RLC bearer or logical channel data of two different ingress links corresponding to the same radio bearer of a certain UE to be mapped to the RLC bearer of two different egress links. transmission.
又例如,接入IAB节点将对应于某个UE的同一个无线承载的两个不同的GTP-U隧道(由GTP-U隧道端点标识TEID或GTP-U TEID+IP地址识别)的数据包,分别指定映射到两个不同出口链路的RLC承载进行传输。For another example, an access IAB node will correspond to two different GTP-U tunnels (identified by the GTP-U tunnel endpoint identifier TEID or GTP-U TEID+IP address) on the same radio bearer of a certain UE. Designate RLC bearers mapped to two different egress links for transmission.
可选地,所述两个不同的GTP-U隧道可以通过不同的GTP-U TEID或GTP-U TEID+IP地址来识别。Optionally, the two different GTP-U tunnels may be identified by different GTP-U TEID or GTP-U TEID+IP address.
再例如,接入IAB节点将对应于某个UE的同一个无线承载的两个不同逻辑信道的数据包,为其添加不同的QoS标签,再将携带所述两个不同的QoS标签的数据包指定映射到两个不同出口的RLC承载进行传输。For another example, the access IAB node adds data packets of two different logical channels corresponding to the same radio bearer of a certain UE with different QoS labels, and then carries the data packets of the two different QoS labels Specify the RLC bearer mapped to two different egresses for transmission.
可选地,所述不同的QoS标签可以为DSCP值,或者flow label值等,这里不作限定。Optionally, the different QoS labels may be DSCP values, or flow label values, etc., which are not limited here.
(2)中间IAB节点(2) Intermediate IAB node
对于中间IAB节点来说,回传链路的承载映射的配置,涉及上行传输和下行传输。中间IAB节点也可以有多种承载映射方式,这些承载映射方式的配置可以是由宿主CU发送给中间IAB节点的,或者可以是由中间IAB节点自行决定的。For the intermediate IAB node, the configuration of the bearer mapping of the backhaul link involves uplink transmission and downlink transmission. The intermediate IAB node may also have multiple bearer mapping modes, and the configuration of these bearer mapping modes may be sent by the host CU to the intermediate IAB node, or may be determined by the intermediate IAB node itself.
中间IAB节点进行上行承载映射的配置时,对于配置了支持数据包的复制传输功能(例如,基于CA方式的数据包复制)且数据包复制传输功能被激活的UE的无线承载(例如记作RB1),从两个不同的RLC承载或逻辑信道上接收到的UE的无线承载RB1所对应的数据包,被分别映射到两个不同出口链路的RLC承载上向下一跳点传输。When the intermediate IAB node performs the uplink bearer mapping configuration, the radio bearer of the UE that is configured to support the data packet replication transmission function (for example, CA-based data packet replication) and the data packet replication transmission function is activated (for example, marked as RB1 ), the data packets corresponding to the radio bearer RB1 of the UE received from two different RLC bearers or logical channels are respectively mapped to the RLC bearers of two different egress links for transmission to the next hop.
中间IAB节点进行下行承载映射的配置时,对于配置了支持数据包的复制传输功能 (例如,基于CA方式的数据包复制)且数据包复制传输功能被激活的UE的无线承载(例如记作RB1),从两个不同的入口链路的RLC承载或逻辑信道上接收到UE的无线承载RB1所对应的数据包,被映射到两个不同出口链路的RLC承载上向下一跳传输。When the intermediate IAB node configures the downlink bearer mapping, the radio bearer of the UE that is configured to support the data packet replication transmission function (for example, CA-based data packet replication) and the data packet replication transmission function is activated (for example, marked as RB1 ), the data packet corresponding to the radio bearer RB1 of the UE received from the RLC bearer or logical channel of two different ingress links is mapped to the RLC bearer of two different egress links for next hop transmission.
可选地,对于上行传输或者下行传输,所述两个不同出口链路的RLC承载对应的逻辑信道被限制了服务的小区。例如,两个不同出口链路的RLC承载对应的逻辑信道服务于不同的小区或不同的小区列表或不同的小区组(cell group)。Optionally, for uplink transmission or downlink transmission, the logical channels corresponding to the RLC bearers of the two different egress links are restricted to serve cells. For example, the logical channels corresponding to the RLC bearers of two different egress links serve different cells or different cell lists or different cell groups.
例如,出口链路1的RLC承载对应于逻辑信道1,出口链路2的RLC承载对用于逻辑信道2。其中,逻辑信道1被限制服务于小区1,逻辑信道2被限制服务于小区2。或者,逻辑信道1被限制服务于小区列表1中的小区,逻辑信道2被限制服务于小区列表2中的小区。其中,小区列表1中的小区和小区列表2中的小区无交集。再或者,逻辑信道1被限制服务于小区组1中包含的小区,逻辑信道2被限制服务于小区组2中包含的小区。其中,小区组1中包含的小区和小区组2中包含的小区无交集。For example, the RLC bearer of egress link 1 corresponds to logical channel 1, and the RLC bearer pair of egress link 2 is used for logical channel 2. Among them, logical channel 1 is restricted to serve cell 1, and logical channel 2 is restricted to serve cell 2. Or, logical channel 1 is restricted to serve cells in cell list 1, and logical channel 2 is restricted to serve cells in cell list 2. Among them, the cells in the cell list 1 and the cells in the cell list 2 have no intersection. Or, logical channel 1 is restricted to serve the cells included in cell group 1, and logical channel 2 is restricted to serve cells included in cell group 2. Among them, the cells included in the cell group 1 and the cells included in the cell group 2 have no intersection.
(3)宿主DU(3) Host DU
对于宿主DU(也即,donor DU)而言,回传链路的承载映射的配置只涉及下行传输。For the donor DU (that is, the donor DU), the configuration of the bearer mapping of the backhaul link only involves downlink transmission.
宿主DU进行下行承载映射的配置时,对于支持数据包复制传输且数据包复制传输功能处于激活态的UE的无线承载,从两个不同的入口链路的RLC承载或逻辑信道上接收到该无线承载所对应的数据包及其副本,被分别映射到两个不同的出口链路的RLC承载或逻辑信道上向下一跳节点传输。When the donor DU configures the downlink bearer mapping, for the radio bearer of the UE that supports data packet replication transmission and the data packet replication transmission function is in the active state, the radio bearer is received from the RLC bearer or logical channel of two different ingress links. The data packet and its copy corresponding to the bearer are respectively mapped to the RLC bearer or logical channel of two different egress links for transmission to the next hop node.
可选地,所述两个不同的出口链路的RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可以被限制服务的小区。例如,不同的出口链路的RLC承载对应的逻辑信道服务于不同的小区或者不同的小区列表或者不同的小区组。这里,不同的小区列表中包含的小区列表无交集,不同的小区组中包含的小区无交集。Optionally, the logical channels corresponding to the RLC bearers of the two different egress links may be restricted to serve cells. For example, logical channels corresponding to RLC bearers of different egress links serve different cells or different cell lists or different cell groups. Here, the cell lists contained in different cell lists have no intersection, and the cells contained in different cell groups have no intersection.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,逻辑信道被限制服务的小区和逻辑信道可用的服务小区可以相互替换。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the cell where the logical channel is restricted to serve and the serving cell where the logical channel is available can be replaced with each other.
宿主DU在进行下行承载映射的配置时,也可以有多种具体的映射方式。下行传输的承载映射方式的配置可以是由宿主CU发送给宿主DU的,也可以是由宿主DU自行决定的。When configuring the downlink bearer mapping, the donor DU may also have multiple specific mapping methods. The configuration of the bearer mapping mode for downlink transmission may be sent by the host CU to the host DU, or may be determined by the host DU itself.
例如,宿主DU将对应于某个UE的同一个无线承载对应的两个不同的GTP-U隧道,分别指定映射到两个不同的出口链路的RLC承载。For example, the donor DU assigns two different GTP-U tunnels corresponding to the same radio bearer of a certain UE, and respectively designates RLC bearers mapped to two different egress links.
又例如,宿主CU为对应于某个UE的同一个无线承载的两个不同逻辑信道的数据包添加不同的QoS标签,再将所述两个不同的QoS标签指定映射到宿主DU的两个不同的出口链路的RLC承载。For another example, the host CU adds different QoS labels to data packets of two different logical channels corresponding to the same radio bearer of a certain UE, and then assigns the two different QoS labels to the two different host DUs. RLC bearer of the egress link.
可选地,所述两个不同的GTP-U隧道可以通过不同的GTP-U TEID或GTP-U TEID+IP地址来识别。Optionally, the two different GTP-U tunnels may be identified by different GTP-U TEID or GTP-U TEID+IP address.
IAB节点以及宿主DU在回传链路上执行承载映射的方式,可以使得UE的复制数据包在回传链路上通过不同的路径传输,从而使得IAB网络的回传链路也为UE的数据传输提供了更高可靠性的保障。The way that the IAB node and the host DU perform bearer mapping on the backhaul link can make the UE's replicated data packet be transmitted through different paths on the backhaul link, so that the backhaul link of the IAB network is also the UE's data Transmission provides a guarantee of higher reliability.
下面再对IAB节点执行路由选择的配置过程进行说明。为了便于描述,下文以第一节点作为示例进行说明。The following describes the configuration process for the IAB node to perform routing. For ease of description, the following uses the first node as an example for description.
本申请实施例中的路由选择配置,可以是针对上行传输的上行路由选择配置,也可以是针对下行传输的下行路由选择配置。The routing configuration in the embodiments of the present application may be an uplink routing configuration for uplink transmission, or a downlink routing configuration for downlink transmission.
第一节点的从宿主CU接收第三配置信息,第三配置信息用于对第一节点的适配层实体进行路由配置,第三配置信息中,包含以下内容:路由标识,对应于路由标识的下一跳节点标识。The first node receives third configuration information from the host CU. The third configuration information is used to configure the routing configuration of the adaptation layer entity of the first node. The third configuration information includes the following content: a routing identifier, corresponding to the routing identifier Next hop node ID.
可选地,路由标识可以是目标节点标识,或者传输路径标识。Optionally, the route identifier may be the target node identifier or the transmission path identifier.
可选地,第一节点可以为接入IAB节点,或者中间IAB节点,或者宿主DU。Optionally, the first node may be an access IAB node, or an intermediate IAB node, or a host DU.
对应于一个路由标识,下一跳节点标识可以仅包含一个节点标识,或者多个节点标识。当有多个下一跳节点标识对应于一个路由标识时,表明对于携带有路由标识的数据包,第一节点可以经过多个不同的下一跳节点转发该数据包。Corresponding to one route identifier, the next hop node identifier may include only one node identifier, or multiple node identifiers. When there are multiple next-hop node identifiers corresponding to one routing identifier, it indicates that for a data packet carrying a routing identifier, the first node can forward the data packet through multiple different next-hop nodes.
可选的,当有多个下一跳节点标识(例如多个下一跳节点至少包含有第一下一跳节点,第二下一跳节点)对应于一个路由标识(例如第一路由标识)时,第三配置信息中还可以包含主路径指示,该主路径指示对应于多个下一跳节点标识的第一下一跳节点的标识,用于指示第一下一跳节点为主路径。则第一节点在进行路由选择时,对于携带有第一路由标识的数据包,选择第一下一跳节点为下一跳节点,向第一下一跳节点发送携带有第一路由标识的数据包。Optionally, when there are multiple next hop node identifiers (for example, the multiple next hop nodes include at least the first next hop node and the second next hop node) correspond to one route identifier (for example, the first route identifier) At this time, the third configuration information may also include a main path indication, the main path indication corresponding to the identifier of the first next hop node corresponding to the multiple next hop node identifiers, and is used to indicate that the first next hop node is the main path. When the first node performs route selection, for the data packet carrying the first route identifier, select the first next hop node as the next hop node, and send the data carrying the first route identifier to the first next hop node package.
或者,当有多个下一跳节点标识(例如,多个下一跳节点至少包含有第一下一跳节点,第二下一跳节点)对应于一个路由标识(例如,第一路由标识)时,第三配置信息中还可以包含主路径指示以及门限值(threshold,TH)。该主路径指示对应于多个下一跳节点标识中的第一下一跳节点的标识,用于指示第一下一跳节点为主路径。则第一节点在进行路由选择时,对于携带有第一路由标识的数据包:Or, when there are multiple next hop node identifiers (for example, the multiple next hop nodes include at least the first next hop node and the second next hop node) correspond to one routing identifier (for example, the first routing identifier) At this time, the third configuration information may also include a primary path indication and a threshold (threshold, TH). The primary path indication corresponds to the identifier of the first next hop node among the multiple next hop node identifiers, and is used to indicate that the first next hop node is the primary path. Then, when the first node performs route selection, for the data packet carrying the first route identifier:
若第一节点中携带有第一路由标识的数据包的数据量小于或者等于门限值TH时,则第一节点选择第一下一跳节点为下一跳节点,向第一下一跳节点发送携带有第一路由标识的数据包;If the data volume of the data packet carrying the first route identifier in the first node is less than or equal to the threshold value TH, the first node selects the first next hop node as the next hop node, and sends it to the first next hop node Sending a data packet carrying the first route identifier;
若第一节点中携带有第一路由标识的数据包的数据量大于门限值TH时,则对于每一个携带有第一路由标识的数据包,第一节点可从多个下一跳节点标识所对应的多个下一跳节点中,任意选择一个下一跳节点,向其发送携带有第一路由标识的数据包。If the data volume of the data packet carrying the first route identifier in the first node is greater than the threshold value TH, for each data packet carrying the first route identifier, the first node can identify from multiple next-hop nodes Among the corresponding multiple next hop nodes, one next hop node is arbitrarily selected, and a data packet carrying the first route identifier is sent to it.
在本申请的技术方案中,在回传链路上可以为UE的duplication数据包配置RLC承载对,或者或配置多个RLC承载,用于传输UE的duplication数据包,因此可以在IAB网络的回传链路上为UE的数据传输提供更高可靠性的保障。In the technical solution of the present application, an RLC bearer pair can be configured for the duplication data packet of the UE on the backhaul link, or multiple RLC bearers can be configured to transmit the duplication data packet of the UE. Therefore, the duplication data packet of the UE can be transmitted on the IAB network. The transmission link provides higher reliability guarantee for UE data transmission.
以上对本申请提供的回传链路的配置进行了详细的说明。实际上,对IAB网络的接入链路进行配置,也可以支持UE的数据包的复制传输,下面作简单介绍。The configuration of the backhaul link provided by this application has been described in detail above. In fact, configuring the access link of the IAB network can also support the duplication and transmission of the UE's data packet, which is briefly introduced below.
如果UE的某个无线承载支持支持数据包的复制传输,由宿主CU向该UE的接入IAB节点进行指示。If a certain radio bearer of the UE supports replication and transmission of data packets, the host CU will indicate to the access IAB node of the UE.
可以理解的是,UE的无线承载可以分为信令无线承载SRB和数据无线承载DRB,下面分别进行说明。It is understandable that the radio bearer of the UE can be divided into signaling radio bearer SRB and data radio bearer DRB, which will be described separately below.
如果UE的某个SRB支持数据包的复制传输,则宿主CU在发给接入IAB节点的配置消息中,针对该SRB的配置内容中包含携带复制传输指示信息(或称为duplication指示信息)。If a certain SRB of the UE supports duplication and transmission of data packets, the configuration message sent to the access IAB node by the host CU includes the configuration content for the SRB that carries duplication transmission indication information (or called duplication indication information).
可选地,宿主CU可以通过F1AP协议层发送的F1AP消息中携带复制传输指示信息。例如,F1AP消息可以是UE的上下文建立请求或者UE的上下文修改请求。Optionally, the host CU may carry the replication transmission instruction information in the F1AP message sent by the F1AP protocol layer. For example, the F1AP message may be a context establishment request of the UE or a context modification request of the UE.
相应地,如果宿主CU针对某个SRB的配置内容中不包含复制传输指示信息,则表明该SRB不支持复制传输。Correspondingly, if the configuration content of the host CU for a certain SRB does not contain replication transmission indication information, it indicates that the SRB does not support replication transmission.
如果UE的某个DRB支持数据包的复制传输,则宿主CU在发给接入IAB节点的配置消息中,针对该DRB的配置内容中包含两个上行GTP-U隧道端点的信息。If a certain DRB of the UE supports the replication and transmission of data packets, the configuration message sent to the access IAB node by the host CU includes the information of two uplink GTP-U tunnel endpoints in the configuration content for the DRB.
这里,所述上行GTP-U隧道端点的信息例如可以为IP地址+GTP-U TEID。Here, the information of the uplink GTP-U tunnel endpoint may be, for example, an IP address+GTP-U TEID.
应理解,宿主CU发送给接入IAB节点的配置消息中携带两个上行GTP-U隧道端点的信息,则表示该DRB的数据包需要通过所述两个不同的GTP-U隧道在宿主CU和接入IAB节点之间传输。此时,接入IAB节点需要将该DRB的相同数据包分别映射到不同的出口链路的RLC承载上发送给下一跳节点。It should be understood that the configuration message sent by the host CU to the access IAB node carries the information of the two uplink GTP-U tunnel endpoints, which means that the DRB data packet needs to pass through the two different GTP-U tunnels in the host CU and Transmission between access IAB nodes. At this time, the access IAB node needs to map the same data packet of the DRB to the RLC bearer of different egress links and send it to the next hop node.
相应地,如果接入IAB接收从宿主CU接收到的针对某个DRB的配置内容中只包含一个上行GTP-U隧道端点的信息,则意味着该DRB不支持数据包的复制传输。此时,接入IAB节点将该DRB的数据包不作特殊处理。Correspondingly, if the configuration content for a certain DRB received by the access IAB received from the host CU only contains information about one uplink GTP-U tunnel endpoint, it means that the DRB does not support the replication and transmission of data packets. At this time, the access IAB node does not perform special processing on the DRB data packet.
应理解,在本申请各实施例中,一个IAB节点对一个无线承载的数据包不作特殊处理,是指不需要将该无线承载的数据包映射到不同的出口链路的RLC承载上。It should be understood that in the embodiments of the present application, an IAB node does not perform special processing on a data packet of a radio bearer, which means that the data packet of the radio bearer does not need to be mapped to RLC bearers of different egress links.
根据以上所述的接入链路的配置原则,对于支持数据包的复制传输的UE的无线承载RB x(这里,x表示无线承载的编号或者标识),接入IAB节点会为RB x在接入链路配置两个RLC承载,也即配置一个RLC承载对。其中,所述两个RLC承载对应的逻辑信道被配置有可用的小区或者小区列表。可选地,这两个RLC承载对应的逻辑信道服务于不同的小区(cell)或小区列表。According to the above-mentioned access link configuration principle, for the radio bearer RB x (here, x represents the number or identifier of the radio bearer) of the UE that supports the duplication and transmission of data packets, the access IAB node will be the RB x in the access Configure two RLC bearers on the incoming link, that is, configure one RLC bearer pair. Wherein, the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers are configured with available cells or cell lists. Optionally, the logical channels corresponding to the two RLC bearers serve different cells or cell lists.
IAB节点完成接入链路的两个RLC承载的配置之后,将这两个RLC承载的配置信息发送给宿主CU,再由宿主CU将该配置信息发送给UE,以便于UE对接入链路的用于传输RB x的duplication数据包(也即数据包及其副本,也可称为复制数据包)的RLC承载进行配置。After the IAB node completes the configuration of the two RLC bearers of the access link, it sends the configuration information of the two RLC bearers to the donor CU, and then the donor CU sends the configuration information to the UE so that the UE can access the link The RLC bearer used to transmit the duplication data packet of the RB x (that is, the data packet and its copy, which may also be called the duplication data packet) is configured.
另外,UE的无线承载的复制传输功能可以被激活或者去激活(deactivation)。UE的某个无线承载的数据包复制传输功能被去激活时,该无线承载的duplication数据包在接入链路只通过一个RLC承载进行传输。可选地,用于传输duplication数据包的这个RLC承载可以认为是主路径。可选地,UE的某个无线承载的数据包复制传输功能被激活时,该无线承载的duplication数据包在接入链路会通过接入链路上配置的两个RLC承载(也即一个RLC承载对)进行传输。In addition, the duplication transmission function of the radio bearer of the UE may be activated or deactivated. When the data packet duplication transmission function of a certain radio bearer of the UE is deactivated, the duplication data packet of the radio bearer is transmitted through only one RLC bearer on the access link. Optionally, this RLC bearer used to transmit duplication data packets may be considered as the primary path. Optionally, when the data packet duplication transmission function of a certain radio bearer of the UE is activated, the duplication data packet of the radio bearer will pass through two RLC bearers configured on the access link (that is, one RLC bearer) on the access link. Bearer pair) for transmission.
可选地,由于UE的无线承载RB x相关的PDCP层配置中,需要包含primary path对应的小区组ID以及逻辑信道标识,而宿主CU发送给UE的RLC承载的配置信息中所包含的逻辑信道标识是由接入IAB节点所分配的。因此,接入IAB节点会将主路径所对应的逻辑信道标识(logical channel identifier,LCID)发送给宿主CU,以便于宿主CU发送给UE。Optionally, since the PDCP layer configuration related to the radio bearer RB x of the UE needs to include the cell group ID and the logical channel identifier corresponding to the primary path, the logical channel included in the configuration information of the RLC bearer sent by the donor CU to the UE The identity is allocated by the access IAB node. Therefore, the access IAB node will send the logical channel identifier (LCID) corresponding to the primary path to the host CU, so that the host CU can send it to the UE.
以上对本申请实施例的传输数据包的方法作了详细说明,下面介绍本申请实施例提供的传输数据包的装置。The method for transmitting data packets in the embodiments of the present application has been described in detail above, and the device for transmitting data packets provided by the embodiments of the present application is introduced below.
参见图11,图11为本申请提供的传输数据包的装置500的示意性结构图。如图11 所示,装置500包括收发单元510和处理单元520。Referring to FIG. 11, FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 500 for transmitting data packets provided by this application. As shown in FIG. 11, the device 500 includes a transceiver unit 510 and a processing unit 520.
收发单元510,用于从宿主集中式单元CU接收第一配置消息,第一配置消息用于指示配置所述装置和第二节点之间的第一无线链路控制RLC承载对,第一RLC承载对用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包,第一无线承载配置了数据包的复制传输的功能,第一RLC承载对包含第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载,所述装置为第二节点的父节点;The transceiver unit 510 is configured to receive a first configuration message from the donor centralized unit CU, where the first configuration message is used to instruct to configure a first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the apparatus and the second node, and the first RLC bearer For the data packet used to transmit the first radio bearer of the first terminal device, the first radio bearer is configured with the function of copying and transmitting the data packet, and the first RLC bearer pair includes the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. Is the parent node of the second node;
处理单元520,用于根据第一配置消息,配置第一RLC承载对。The processing unit 520 is configured to configure the first RLC bearer pair according to the first configuration message.
可选地,收发单元510还用于向所述宿主CU发送第一响应消息,第一响应消息中携带第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识和/或第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识。Optionally, the transceiver unit 510 is further configured to send a first response message to the donor CU, where the first response message carries the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and/or the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer .
可选地,收发单元510还用于接收第二节点仅在第一RLC承载对中作为主路径的RLC承载上发送的第一无线承载的数据包。Optionally, the transceiving unit 510 is further configured to receive the data packet of the first radio bearer sent by the second node only on the RLC bearer serving as the primary path in the first RLC bearer pair.
可选地,收发单元510还用于从宿主CU接收第一通知消息,第一通知消息用于指示启用第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,第一通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。Optionally, the transceiving unit 510 is further configured to receive a first notification message from the donor CU, where the first notification message is used to indicate the restriction of the available serving cell for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the logic corresponding to the second RLC bearer. The restriction on the serving cell available for the channel, or the first notification message is used to instruct the cancellation of the restriction on the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer limits.
可选地,处理单元520还用于将从两个不同的逻辑信道上接收到的所述第一无线承载的数据包分别映射到所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载上。Optionally, the processing unit 520 is further configured to map the data packets of the first radio bearer received from two different logical channels to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer, respectively.
可选地,处理单元520还用于将第一无线承载对应的两个不同的通用分组无线服务隧道协议GTP隧道上接收到的数据包分别映射到所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载上。Optionally, the processing unit 520 is further configured to map data packets received on two different General Packet Radio Service Tunneling Protocol GTP tunnels corresponding to the first radio bearer to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC respectively. Bearing on.
在一种实现方式中,装置500可以为芯片或集成电路。In one implementation, the device 500 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.
此种情况下,收发单元510可以为通信接口,例如,输入输出接口,输入接口电路和输出接口电路等。处理单元520可以为处理器。In this case, the transceiver unit 510 may be a communication interface, for example, an input/output interface, an input interface circuit, an output interface circuit, and so on. The processing unit 520 may be a processor.
在另一种实现方式中,装置500可以完全对应本申请方法实施例中的第一节点。装置500包括的各单元分别用于实现各方法实施例中由第一节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。In another implementation manner, the apparatus 500 may completely correspond to the first node in the method embodiment of the present application. The units included in the apparatus 500 are respectively used to implement corresponding operations and/or processing performed by the first node in each method embodiment.
此种情况下,收发单元510可以为收发器,收发器包括发射机和接收机,同时具备接收和发送的功能。处理单元520可以为处理器。In this case, the transceiver unit 510 may be a transceiver, which includes a transmitter and a receiver, and has both receiving and sending functions. The processing unit 520 may be a processor.
参见图12,图12为本申请提供的传输数据包的装置600的示意性结构图。如图12所示,装置600包括收发单元610和处理单元620。Referring to FIG. 12, FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of an apparatus 600 for transmitting data packets provided by this application. As shown in FIG. 12, the device 600 includes a transceiver unit 610 and a processing unit 620.
收发单元610,用于从宿主集中式单元CU接收第二配置消息,第二配置消息用于指示配置所述装置和第一节点之间的第一无线链路控制RLC承载对,第一RLC承载对用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包,第一无线承载配置了数据包的复制传输的功能,第一RLC承载对包含第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载,所述装置为第一节点的子节点;The transceiver unit 610 is configured to receive a second configuration message from the donor centralized unit CU, where the second configuration message is used to instruct to configure the first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the device and the first node, the first RLC bearer For the data packet used to transmit the first radio bearer of the first terminal device, the first radio bearer is configured with the function of copying and transmitting the data packet, and the first RLC bearer pair includes the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. Is a child node of the first node;
处理单元620,用于根据所述第二配置消息,配置所述第一RLC承载对。The processing unit 620 is configured to configure the first RLC bearer pair according to the second configuration message.
可选地,收发单元610还用于从所述宿主CU接收到用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制的第一通知消息,以及,收发单元610仅通过所述第一RLC承载对中作为主路径的RLC承载向所述第一节点 传输数据包。Optionally, the transceiver unit 610 is further configured to receive, from the donor CU, a first notification message for instructing to cancel the restriction on the serving cells available for the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. , And, the transceiver unit 610 transmits data packets to the first node only through the RLC bearer in the first RLC bearer pair as the primary path.
可选地,收发单元610还用于从一个逻辑信道接收到所述第一无线承载的数据包,以及,收发单元610仅通过所述第一RLC承载对中作为主路径的RLC承载向所述第一节点传输数据包。Optionally, the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to receive the data packet of the first radio bearer from a logical channel, and the transceiving unit 610 only transmits the RLC bearer as the primary path in the first RLC bearer pair to the The first node transmits the data packet.
可选地,处理单元620还用于确定所述第一无线承载的数据包的数量不超过预设门限时,所述收发单元610仅通过所述第一RLC承载对中作为主路径的RLC承载向所述第一节点传输数据包。Optionally, the processing unit 620 is further configured to determine that the number of data packets of the first radio bearer does not exceed a preset threshold, and the transceiving unit 610 only uses the RLC bearer of the first RLC bearer pair as the primary path. Transmitting a data packet to the first node.
可选地,收发单元610还用于从宿主CU接收第一通知消息,第一通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,第一通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。Optionally, the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to receive a first notification message from the donor CU, where the first notification message is used to indicate to enable the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer Restrictions on the serving cells available for the respective corresponding logical channels, or the first notification message is used to instruct the cancellation of the restriction on the serving cells available for the logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the respective logical channels corresponding to the second RLC bearer Limits of available serving cells.
可选地,收发单元610还用于从第一节点接收第二通知消息,第二通知消息用于指示启用或取消所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。Optionally, the transceiving unit 610 is further configured to receive a second notification message from the first node, where the second notification message is used to instruct to enable or cancel the available logical channels corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. Restriction of serving cell.
可选地,处理单元620还用于确定所述第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态,以及收发单元610还用于向宿主CU发送用于指示所述第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态的信息。Optionally, the processing unit 620 is further configured to determine the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer, and the transceiver unit 610 is further configured to send a data packet indicating the first radio bearer to the host CU Copy the information of the activation status of the transfer function.
可选地,处理单元620还用于将从两个不同的逻辑信道上的接收到的所述第一无线承载的数据包分别映射到所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载上。Optionally, the processing unit 620 is further configured to map the received data packets of the first radio bearer on two different logical channels to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer, respectively.
在一种实现方式中,装置600可以为芯片或集成电路。In one implementation, the device 600 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.
此种情况下,收发单元610可以为通信接口,例如,输入输出接口,输入接口电路和输出接口电路等。处理单元620可以为处理器。In this case, the transceiver unit 610 may be a communication interface, for example, an input/output interface, an input interface circuit, an output interface circuit, and so on. The processing unit 620 may be a processor.
在另一种实现方式中,装置600可以完全对应本申请方法实施例中的第二节点。装置600包括的各单元分别用于实现各方法实施例中由第二节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。In another implementation manner, the apparatus 600 may completely correspond to the second node in the method embodiment of the present application. The units included in the apparatus 600 are respectively used to implement corresponding operations and/or processing performed by the second node in each method embodiment.
此种情况下,收发单元610可以为收发器,收发器包括发射机和接收机。处理单元620可以为处理器。In this case, the transceiver unit 610 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver includes a transmitter and a receiver. The processing unit 620 may be a processor.
参见图13,图13为本申请提供的传输数据包的装置700的示意性结构图。如图13所示,装置700包括收发单元710和处理单元720。Referring to FIG. 13, FIG. 13 is a schematic structural diagram of a data packet transmission apparatus 700 provided by this application. As shown in FIG. 13, the device 700 includes a transceiver unit 710 and a processing unit 720.
处理单元710,用于生成第一配置消息,第一配置消息用于指示配置第一节点和第二节点之间的第一无线链路控制RLC承载对,第一RLC承载对用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包,第一无线承载配置了数据包的复制传输的功能,第一RLC承载对包含第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载,第一节点为第二节点的父节点;The processing unit 710 is configured to generate a first configuration message, where the first configuration message is used to instruct to configure a first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the first node and the second node, and the first RLC bearer pair is used to transmit the first The data packet of the first radio bearer of the terminal device. The first radio bearer is configured with the function of copying and transmitting the data packet. The first RLC bearer pair includes the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. The first node is the parent of the second node. node;
收发单元720,用于向第一节点发送第一配置消息。The transceiver unit 720 is configured to send a first configuration message to the first node.
可选地,收发单元720还用于从第一节点接收第一响应消息,第一响应消息中携带所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识和/或所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识。Optionally, the transceiver unit 720 is further configured to receive a first response message from the first node, where the first response message carries the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and/or the logic corresponding to the second RLC bearer The ID of the channel.
可选地,处理单元710还用于生成第二配置消息,以及收发单元720还用于向第二节点发送第二配置消息。Optionally, the processing unit 710 is further configured to generate a second configuration message, and the transceiver unit 720 is further configured to send a second configuration message to the second node.
可选地,处理单元710还用于生成第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示所述第一 RLC承载对中作为主路径的RLC承载。Optionally, the processing unit 710 is further configured to generate third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate the RLC bearer serving as the primary path in the first RLC bearer pair.
可选地,收发单元720还用于向第一节点和第二节点发送第一通知消息。第一通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,第一通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。Optionally, the transceiver unit 720 is further configured to send the first notification message to the first node and the second node. The first notification message is used to indicate to enable the restriction of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the restriction of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer, or the first notification message is used For instructing to cancel the restriction on the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the restriction on the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
可选地,处理单元710还用于在收发单元720发送第一通知消息之前,确定所述第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态,或者,收发单元720从服务于所述第一终端设备的接入回传节点接收用于指示所述第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态的信息。Optionally, the processing unit 710 is further configured to determine the activation state of the data packet copy transmission function of the first radio bearer before the transceiver unit 720 sends the first notification message, or the transceiver unit 720 serves the first notification message. The access backhaul node of the terminal device receives information used to indicate the activation state of the data packet copy transmission function of the first radio bearer.
可选地,处理单元710还用于将第一无线承载对应的两个不同的GTP隧道上接收到的数据包映射到第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载上。Optionally, the processing unit 710 is further configured to map data packets received on two different GTP tunnels corresponding to the first radio bearer to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer.
在一种实现方式中,装置600可以为芯片或集成电路。In one implementation, the device 600 may be a chip or an integrated circuit.
此种情况下,处理单元710可以为处理器。收发单元720可以为通信接口,例如,输入输出接口,输入接口电路和输出接口电路等。In this case, the processing unit 710 may be a processor. The transceiver unit 720 may be a communication interface, for example, an input/output interface, an input interface circuit, an output interface circuit, and so on.
在另一种实现方式中,装置700可以完全对应本申请方法实施例中的宿主节点。装置700包括的各单元分别用于实现各方法实施例中由宿主节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。In another implementation manner, the apparatus 700 may completely correspond to the host node in the method embodiment of the present application. The units included in the apparatus 700 are respectively used to implement corresponding operations and/or processing performed by the host node in each method embodiment.
此种情况下,处理单元710可以为处理器。收发单元720可以为收发器,收发器包括发射机和接收机。In this case, the processing unit 710 may be a processor. The transceiver unit 720 may be a transceiver, and the transceiver includes a transmitter and a receiver.
以上装置实施例中所述的芯片,可以是现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array,FPGA)、专用集成芯片(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、系统芯片(system on chip,SoC)、中央处理器(central processor unit,CPU)、网络处理器(Network Processor,NP)、数字信号处理电路(digital signal processor,DSP),还可以是微控制器(micro controller unit,MCU、可编程控制器(programmable logic device,PLD)或其它集成芯片。The chips described in the above device embodiments may be field-programmable gate arrays (FPGA), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), system on chips (SoC), and central Processor (central processor unit, CPU), network processor (Network Processor, NP), digital signal processing circuit (digital signal processor, DSP), can also be a microcontroller (microcontroller unit, MCU, programmable controller ( programmable logic device (PLD) or other integrated chips.
此外,本申请还提供一种网络设备1000,下面结合图14进行说明。In addition, this application also provides a network device 1000, which is described below with reference to FIG. 14.
参见图14,图14是本申请提供的网络设备1000的结构示意图。如图14所示,网络设备1000包括天线1101、射频装置1102、基带装置1103。天线1101与射频装置1102连接。在上行方向,射频装置1102通过天线1101接收上一跳网络节点发送的信号,并将接收到的信号发送给基带装置1103进行处理。在下行方向,基带装置1103对需要发送给下一跳网络节点的信号进行处理,并发送给射频装置1102,射频装置1102通过天线1101将所述信号发送出去。Refer to FIG. 14, which is a schematic structural diagram of a network device 1000 provided by the present application. As shown in FIG. 14, the network equipment 1000 includes an antenna 1101, a radio frequency device 1102, and a baseband device 1103. The antenna 1101 is connected to the radio frequency device 1102. In the uplink direction, the radio frequency device 1102 receives the signal sent by the previous hop network node through the antenna 1101, and sends the received signal to the baseband device 1103 for processing. In the downlink direction, the baseband device 1103 processes the signal to be sent to the next-hop network node, and sends it to the radio frequency device 1102, and the radio frequency device 1102 sends the signal through the antenna 1101.
基带装置1103可以包括一个或多个处理单元11031。此外,基带装置1103还可以包括存储单元11032和通信接口11033。存储单元11032用于存储计算机程序和数据。通信接口11033用于和射频装置1102交互信息。通信接口11033可以为输入输出接口或者输入输出电路。The baseband device 1103 may include one or more processing units 11031. In addition, the baseband device 1103 may further include a storage unit 11032 and a communication interface 11033. The storage unit 11032 is used to store computer programs and data. The communication interface 11033 is used to exchange information with the radio frequency device 1102. The communication interface 11033 may be an input/output interface or an input/output circuit.
可选地,当装置500和第一节点完全对应时,装置500的结构可以如图12所示的网络设备1000。例如,收发单元510可以由射频装置1102实现,处理单元520可以由基带装置1103实现。Optionally, when the apparatus 500 completely corresponds to the first node, the structure of the apparatus 500 may be a network device 1000 as shown in FIG. 12. For example, the transceiver unit 510 may be implemented by the radio frequency device 1102, and the processing unit 520 may be implemented by the baseband device 1103.
例如,射频装置1102用于通过天线1101从宿主CU接收第一配置消息,并通过通信接口11033将第一配置消息发送给基带装置1103。基带装置1103用于根据第一配置消息配置和第二节点之间的第一RLC承载对。For example, the radio frequency device 1102 is configured to receive the first configuration message from the host CU through the antenna 1101, and send the first configuration message to the baseband device 1103 through the communication interface 11033. The baseband device 1103 is configured to configure the first RLC bearer pair with the second node according to the first configuration message.
又例如,基带装置1103还用于生成第一响应消息,并通过通信接口11033将第一响应消息发送给射频装置1102。射频装置1102还用于通过天线1101将第一响应消息发送给宿主CU。For another example, the baseband device 1103 is further configured to generate a first response message, and send the first response message to the radio frequency device 1102 through the communication interface 11033. The radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to send the first response message to the host CU through the antenna 1101.
又例如,射频装置1102还用于通过天线1101接收第一通知消息。射频装置1102还用于发送第二通知消息。For another example, the radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to receive the first notification message through the antenna 1101. The radio frequency device 1102 is also used to send a second notification message.
又例如,基带装置1103还用于执行承载映射,生成第二指示信息等。For another example, the baseband device 1103 is also used to perform bearer mapping, generate second indication information, and so on.
可选地,当装置600和第二节点完全对应时,装置600的结构也可以如图12所示的网络设备1000。例如,收发单元610可以由射频装置1102实现,处理单元620可以由基带装置1103实现。Optionally, when the apparatus 600 completely corresponds to the second node, the structure of the apparatus 600 may also be a network device 1000 as shown in FIG. 12. For example, the transceiver unit 610 may be implemented by the radio frequency device 1102, and the processing unit 620 may be implemented by the baseband device 1103.
例如,射频装置1102用于通过天线1101从宿主CU接收第二配置消息,并通过通信接口11033将第二配置消息发送给基带装置1103。基带装置1103用于根据第二配置消息配置和第一节点之间的第一RLC承载对。For example, the radio frequency device 1102 is configured to receive the second configuration message from the host CU through the antenna 1101, and send the second configuration message to the baseband device 1103 through the communication interface 11033. The baseband device 1103 is configured to configure the first RLC bearer pair with the first node according to the second configuration message.
又例如,基带装置1103还用于生成第二响应消息,并通过通信接口11033将第二响应消息发送给射频装置1102。射频装置1102还用于通过天线1101将第二响应消息发送给宿主CU。For another example, the baseband device 1103 is further configured to generate a second response message, and send the second response message to the radio frequency device 1102 through the communication interface 11033. The radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to send the second response message to the host CU through the antenna 1101.
又例如,射频装置1102还用于通过天线1101接收第一通知消息。或者,射频装置1102还用于接收第二通知消息。For another example, the radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to receive the first notification message through the antenna 1101. Alternatively, the radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to receive the second notification message.
又例如,射频装置1102还用于通过天线1101接收第二通知消息。For another example, the radio frequency device 1102 is further configured to receive the second notification message through the antenna 1101.
在一种实现中,若装置600和服务于第一终端设备的接入回传节点完全对应,基带装置1103还用于确定第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态。In an implementation, if the device 600 completely corresponds to the access backhaul node serving the first terminal device, the baseband device 1103 is also used to determine the activation state of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer.
又例如,基带装置1103还用于将第一无线承载对应的两个不同的逻辑信道上的数据包分别映射到第一RLC承载对的第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载上。For another example, the baseband device 1103 is further configured to map data packets on two different logical channels corresponding to the first radio bearer to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer of the first RLC bearer pair, respectively.
可选地,当装置700和宿主节点完全对应时,装置700的结构可以如图14所示的网络设备1000。例如,处理单元710可以由基带装置1103实现,收发单元720可以由射频装置1102实现。Optionally, when the apparatus 700 and the host node completely correspond, the structure of the apparatus 700 may be a network device 1000 as shown in FIG. 14. For example, the processing unit 710 may be implemented by the baseband device 1103, and the transceiver unit 720 may be implemented by the radio frequency device 1102.
例如,基带装置1103用于生成第一配置消息,射频装置1102用于通过天线1101接收第一响应消息。基带装置1103还用于生成第一配置消息中的第一配置内容和第二配置内容。For example, the baseband device 1103 is used to generate the first configuration message, and the radio frequency device 1102 is used to receive the first response message through the antenna 1101. The baseband device 1103 is also used to generate the first configuration content and the second configuration content in the first configuration message.
又例如,基带装置1103用于生成第二配置消息,射频装置1102用于通过天线1101接收第二响应消息。基带装置1103还用于生成第二配置消息中的第三配置内容和第四配置内容。For another example, the baseband device 1103 is used to generate the second configuration message, and the radio frequency device 1102 is used to receive the second response message through the antenna 1101. The baseband device 1103 is also used to generate the third configuration content and the fourth configuration content in the second configuration message.
又例如,基带装置1103还用于生成第一指示信息,第三指示信息。For another example, the baseband device 1103 is further configured to generate first indication information and third indication information.
在一种实现中,基带装置1103还用于确定第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状态。In an implementation, the baseband device 1103 is also used to determine the activation state of the data packet copy transmission function of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device.
又例如,射频装置1102还用于发送第一通知消息。For another example, the radio frequency device 1102 is also used to send the first notification message.
此外,本申请还提供一种通信系统,包括如方法实施例中所述的第一节点,第二节点 以及宿主节点中的一个或多个。In addition, this application also provides a communication system, including one or more of the first node, the second node, and the host node as described in the method embodiment.
本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行任一方法实施例中由第一节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。The present application provides a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions. When the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer can execute the corresponding operations performed by the first node in any method embodiment and/ Or processing.
本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行任一方法实施例中由第二节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。This application provides a computer-readable storage medium in which computer instructions are stored. When the computer instructions are run on the computer, the computer is caused to execute the corresponding operations performed by the second node in any method embodiment and/ Or processing.
本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机指令,当计算机指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行任一方法实施例中由宿主节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。This application provides a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium stores computer instructions. When the computer instructions run on the computer, the computer can execute the corresponding operations performed by the host node in any method embodiment and/or deal with.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请任一方法实施例中由第一节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。This application also provides a computer program product. The computer program product includes computer program code. When the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding operations and/or performed by the first node in any method embodiment of this application. deal with.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请任一方法实施例中由第二节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。This application also provides a computer program product. The computer program product includes computer program code. When the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding operations and/or performed by the second node in any method embodiment of this application. deal with.
本申请还提供一种计算机程序产品,计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码,当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行本申请任一方法实施例中由第二节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。This application also provides a computer program product. The computer program product includes computer program code. When the computer program code runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding operations and/or performed by the second node in any method embodiment of this application. deal with.
本申请还提供一种芯片,包括处理器。处理器用于调用并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行本申请任一方法实施例中由第一节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。This application also provides a chip including a processor. The processor is used to call and run a computer program stored in the memory to execute the corresponding operation and/or processing performed by the first node in any method embodiment of the present application.
可选地,所述芯片还包括存储器,存储器与处理器连接。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中的计算机程序。Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is connected to the processor. The processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
进一步可选地,芯片还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口连接。通信接口用于接收待处理的信号和/或数据,处理器从通信接口获取该待处理的信号和/或数据,并对其进行处理。Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface. The communication interface is used to receive signals and/or data to be processed, and the processor obtains the signals and/or data to be processed from the communication interface and processes them.
本申请还提供一种芯片,包括处理器。处理器用于调用并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行本申请任一方法实施例中由第二节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。This application also provides a chip including a processor. The processor is used to call and run a computer program stored in the memory to execute corresponding operations and/or processing performed by the second node in any method embodiment of the present application.
可选地,所述芯片还包括存储器,存储器与处理器连接。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中的计算机程序。Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is connected to the processor. The processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
进一步可选地,芯片还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口连接。通信接口用于接收待处理的信号和/或数据,处理器从通信接口获取该待处理的信号和/或数据,并对其进行处理。Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface. The communication interface is used to receive signals and/or data to be processed, and the processor obtains the signals and/or data to be processed from the communication interface and processes them.
本申请还提供一种芯片,包括处理器。处理器用于调用并运行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以执行本申请任一方法实施例中由宿主节点执行的相应操作和/或处理。This application also provides a chip including a processor. The processor is used to call and run a computer program stored in the memory to execute corresponding operations and/or processing performed by the host node in any method embodiment of the present application.
可选地,所述芯片还包括存储器,存储器与处理器连接。处理器用于读取并执行存储器中的计算机程序。Optionally, the chip further includes a memory, and the memory is connected to the processor. The processor is used to read and execute the computer program in the memory.
进一步可选地,芯片还包括通信接口,处理器与通信接口连接。通信接口用于接收待处理的信号和/或数据,处理器从通信接口获取待处理的信号和/或数据,并对其进行处理。Further optionally, the chip further includes a communication interface, and the processor is connected to the communication interface. The communication interface is used to receive signals and/or data to be processed, and the processor obtains the signals and/or data to be processed from the communication interface and processes them.
可选地,上述通信接口可以是输入输出接口,具体可以包括输入接口和输出接口。或者,通信接口可以是输入输出电路,具体可以包括输入接口电路和输出接口电路。Optionally, the aforementioned communication interface may be an input/output interface, which may specifically include an input interface and an output interface. Alternatively, the communication interface may be an input/output circuit, which may specifically include an input interface circuit and an output interface circuit.
上述各实施例中涉及的存储器与存储器可以是物理上相互独立的单元,或者,存储器也可以和处理器集成在一起。The memory and the memory involved in the foregoing embodiments may be physically independent units, or the memory may also be integrated with the processor.
在一种实现中,当网络设备为第一节点时,网络设备实现以上方法实施例中由第一节点执行的操作和/或处理可以是通过处理单元调用程序的形式实现的。例如,处理单元11031调用存储单元11032存储的程序,以执行以上方法实施例中由第一节点执行的操作和/或处理。存储单元11032可以是和处理单元11031处于同一芯片上的存储元件,即片内存储单元,也可以是和与处理单元11031处于不同芯片上的存储元件,即片外存储单元。In an implementation, when the network device is the first node, the network device may implement the operations and/or processing performed by the first node in the above method embodiments by calling a program by the processing unit. For example, the processing unit 11031 calls a program stored by the storage unit 11032 to execute the operation and/or processing performed by the first node in the above method embodiment. The storage unit 11032 may be a storage element on the same chip as the processing unit 11031, that is, an on-chip storage unit, or a storage element on a different chip from the processing unit 11031, that is, an off-chip storage unit.
在另一种实现中,当网络设备为第二节点时,网络设备实现以上方法实施例中由第二节点执行的操作和/或处理可以是通过处理单元调用程序的形式实现的。In another implementation, when the network device is the second node, the network device can implement the operations and/or processing performed by the second node in the above method embodiments by calling a program by the processing unit.
在另一种实现中,当网络设备为宿主节点时,网络设备实现以上方法实施例中由宿主节点执行的操作和/或处理可以是通过处理单元调用程序的形式实现的。In another implementation, when the network device is the host node, the network device can implement the operations and/or processing performed by the host node in the above method embodiments by calling a program by the processing unit.
以上各实施例中,处理器可以为中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、微处理器、特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或一个或多个用于控制本申请技术方案程序执行的集成电路等。例如,处理器可以是数字信号处理器设备、微处理器设备、模数转换器、数模转换器等。处理器可以根据这些设备各自的功能而在这些设备之间分配终端设备或网络设备的控制和信号处理的功能。此外,处理器可以具有操作一个或多个软件程序的功能,软件程序可以存储在存储器中。处理器的所述功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In the above embodiments, the processor may be a central processing unit (CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more of them used to control the technology of the application Integrated circuits for program execution, etc. For example, the processor may be a digital signal processor device, a microprocessor device, an analog-to-digital converter, a digital-to-analog converter, etc. The processor can distribute control and signal processing functions of terminal devices or network devices among these devices according to their respective functions. In addition, the processor may have a function of operating one or more software programs, and the software programs may be stored in the memory. The functions of the processor can be realized by hardware, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可存储静态信息和指令的其它类型的静态存储设备、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)或可存储信息和指令的其它类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其它磁存储设备,或者还可以是能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其它介质等。The memory can be read-only memory (ROM), other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), or other types that can store information and instructions Dynamic storage devices can also be electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or other optical disk storage, optical disc storage ( Including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and can Any other medium accessed by the computer, etc.
本申请实施例中,“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示单独存在A、同时存在A和B、单独存在B的情况。其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。In the embodiments of the present application, "and/or" describes the association relationship of the associated objects, which means that there can be three kinds of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean that A exists alone, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. Happening. Among them, A and B can be singular or plural.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能。A person of ordinary skill in the art may be aware that, in combination with the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the units can be implemented by electronic hardware or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professional technicians can use different methods for each specific application to achieve the described functions.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例只是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件 可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed system, device, and method may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division, and there may be other divisions in actual implementation, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or may be Integrate into another system, or some features can be ignored or not implemented. In addition, the displayed or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be indirect coupling or communication connection through some interfaces, devices or units, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the objectives of the solutions of the embodiments.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, the functional units in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist alone physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the function is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of this application essentially or the part that contributes to the existing technology or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the method described in each embodiment of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program code .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of this application, but the protection scope of this application is not limited to this. Any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application. Should be covered within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of this application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (22)

  1. 一种配置无线链路控制RLC承载的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for configuring a radio link control RLC bearer is characterized in that it includes:
    第一节点从宿主集中式单元CU接收第一配置消息,所述第一配置消息用于指示配置所述第一节点和第二节点之间的第一无线链路控制RLC承载对,所述第一RLC承载对用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包,所述第一无线承载具有数据包的复制传输的功能,所述第一RLC承载对包括第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载,所述第一节点为所述第二节点的父节点;The first node receives a first configuration message from the donor centralized unit CU, where the first configuration message is used to instruct to configure a first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the first node and the second node. An RLC bearer pair is used to transmit data packets of a first radio bearer of a first terminal device, the first radio bearer has the function of copying and transmitting data packets, and the first RLC bearer pair includes a first RLC bearer and a second RLC bearer. RLC bearer, the first node is the parent node of the second node;
    所述第一节点根据所述第一配置消息,配置所述第一RLC承载对。The first node configures the first RLC bearer pair according to the first configuration message.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置消息中包含所述第一RLC承载的第一配置内容和所述第二RLC承载的第二配置内容,所述第一配置内容和所述第二配置内容满足如下任意一种方式:The method according to claim 1, wherein the first configuration message contains first configuration content carried by the first RLC and second configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the first configuration The content and the second configuration content satisfy any of the following methods:
    所述第一配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和所述第二RLC承载的标识,所述第二配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一RLC承载的标识;或者,The first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the second configuration content includes the identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer. Logo; or,
    所述第一配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和第一标识,所述第二配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一标识,所述第一标识用于关联所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载组成所述第一RLC承载对。The first configuration content includes the identifier and the first identifier of the first RLC bearer, the second configuration content includes the identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, and the first identifier is used for Associating the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一标识为所述第一无线承载的标识。The method according to claim 2, wherein the first identifier is an identifier of the first radio bearer.
  4. 根据权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置消息中包含服务质量QoS信息和第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述第一节点根据所述QoS信息配置所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载,以组成所述第一RLC承载对。The method according to claim 2, wherein the first configuration message contains quality of service (QoS) information and first indication information, and the first indication information is used to instruct the first node according to the QoS information The first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer are configured to form the first RLC bearer pair.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一节点向所述宿主CU发送第一响应消息,所述第一响应消息中携带所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识和/或所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道的标识。The first node sends a first response message to the donor CU, where the first response message carries the identifier of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and/or the information of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer Logo.
  6. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一节点为中间回传节点,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein the first node is an intermediate backhaul node, and the method further comprises:
    所述第一节点从所述宿主CU接收第一通知消息,所述第一通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,所述第一通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。The first node receives a first notification message from the donor CU, where the first notification message is used to indicate to enable the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. The corresponding logical channel can be used to limit the available serving cells, or the first notification message is used to instruct the cancellation of the first RLC bearer and the corresponding logical channel of the corresponding logical channel. The limit of the service cell available for the channel.
  7. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1-5, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第一节点从所述宿主CU接收第二通知消息,所述第二通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,所述第二通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制;The first node receives a second notification message from the donor CU, where the second notification message is used to indicate to enable the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and corresponds to the second RLC bearer Or, the second notification message is used to instruct the cancellation of the restriction on the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the availability of the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer The limitation of the service area;
    所述第一节点向所述第二节点发送第三通知消息,所述第三通知消息用于向所述第二节点指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,所述第三通知消息用于向所述第二节点指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。The first node sends a third notification message to the second node, where the third notification message is used to indicate to the second node to enable the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and The second RLC bearer has the restriction of the available serving cell of the logical channel, or the third notification message is used to instruct the second node to cancel the available serving cell of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer Restriction and restriction of the serving cell available for the logical channel corresponding to the second RLC bearer.
  8. 一种配置无线链路控制RLC承载的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for configuring a radio link control RLC bearer is characterized in that it includes:
    第二节点从宿主集中式单元CU接收第二配置消息,所述第二配置消息用于指示配置所述第二节点和第一节点之间的第一无线链路控制RLC承载对,所述第一RLC承载对用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包,所述第一无线承载具备数据包的复制传输的功能,所述第一RLC承载对包含第一RLC承载和第二RLC承载,所述第二节点为所述第一节点的子节点;The second node receives a second configuration message from the donor centralized unit CU, where the second configuration message is used to instruct to configure the first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the second node and the first node. An RLC bearer pair is used to transmit data packets of a first radio bearer of a first terminal device, the first radio bearer has the function of copying and transmitting data packets, and the first RLC bearer pair includes a first RLC bearer and a second RLC bearer. RLC bearer, the second node is a child node of the first node;
    所述第二节点根据所述第二配置消息,配置所述第一RLC承载对。The second node configures the first RLC bearer pair according to the second configuration message.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二配置消息中包含所述第一RLC承载的第三配置内容和所述第二RLC承载的第四配置内容,所述第三配置内容和所述第四配置内容满足如下任意一种方式:The method according to claim 8, wherein the second configuration message contains the third configuration content carried by the first RLC and the fourth configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the third configuration The content and the fourth configuration content satisfy any of the following methods:
    所述第三配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和所述第二RLC承载的标识,所述第四配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一RLC承载的标识;或者,The third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the fourth configuration content includes the identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer. Logo; or,
    所述第三配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和第一标识,所述第四配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一标识,所述第一标识用于关联所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载组成所述第一RLC承载对。The third configuration content includes the identifier and the first identifier of the first RLC bearer, the fourth configuration content includes the identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, and the first identifier is used for Associating the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一标识为所述第一无线承载的标识。The method according to claim 9, wherein the first identifier is an identifier of the first radio bearer.
  11. 根据权利要求8-10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 8-10, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第二节点从所述宿主CU接收第一通知消息,所述第一通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,所述第一通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。The second node receives a first notification message from the donor CU, where the first notification message is used to indicate to enable the restriction of the available serving cells of the logical channel corresponding to the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the first notification message. 2. Restrictions on the serving cells available for the logical channel corresponding to the RLC bearer, or the first notification message is used to instruct the cancellation of the restriction on the serving cells available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and corresponds to the second RLC bearer The limit of the available serving cell of the logical channel.
  12. 根据权利要求8-10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 8-10, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述第二节点从所述第一节点接收第三通知消息,所述第三通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,所述第三通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。The second node receives a third notification message from the first node, where the third notification message is used to indicate to enable the restriction of available serving cells of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer Restrictions on the serving cells available for the respective corresponding logical channels, or the third notification message is used to instruct to cancel the restriction on the serving cells available for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the respective corresponding to the second RLC bearer The limit of the service cell available for the logical channel.
  13. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二节点是为所述第一终端设备提供接入服务的节点,所述第二节点从所述宿主CU接收第一通知消息之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the second node is a node that provides access services for the first terminal device, and before the second node receives the first notification message from the host CU, The method also includes:
    所述第二节点确定所述第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能激活或者去激活;Determining, by the second node, that the data packet copy transmission function of the first radio bearer is activated or deactivated;
    所述第二节点向所述宿主CU指示所述第一无线承载的数据包复制传输功能的激活状 态。The second node indicates to the host CU the activation status of the data packet replication transmission function of the first radio bearer.
  14. 一种配置无线链路控制RLC承载的方法,其特征在于,包括:A method for configuring a radio link control RLC bearer is characterized in that it includes:
    宿主集中式单元CU生成第一配置消息,所述第一配置消息用于指示配置第一节点和第二节点之间的第一无线链路控制RLC承载对,所述第一RLC承载对用于传输第一终端设备的第一无线承载的数据包,所述第一无线承载具备数据包的复制传输的功能,所述第一RLC承载对包含第一RL承载和第二RLC承载,所述第一节点为所述第二节点的父节点;The donor centralized unit CU generates a first configuration message, the first configuration message is used to instruct to configure the first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the first node and the second node, and the first RLC bearer pair is used for The data packet of the first radio bearer of the first terminal device is transmitted. The first radio bearer has the function of copying and transmitting data packets. The first RLC bearer pair includes a first RL bearer and a second RLC bearer. A node is the parent node of the second node;
    所述宿主CU向所述第一节点发送所述第一配置消息。The host CU sends the first configuration message to the first node.
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一配置消息中包含所述第一RLC承载的第一配置内容和所述第二RLC承载的第二配置内容,所述第一配置内容和所述第二配置内容满足如下任意一种方式:The method according to claim 14, wherein the first configuration message contains first configuration content carried by the first RLC and second configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the first configuration The content and the second configuration content satisfy any of the following methods:
    所述第一配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和所述第二RLC承载的标识,所述第二配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一RLC承载的标识;或者,The first configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the second configuration content includes the identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer. Logo; or,
    所述第一配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和第一标识,所述第二配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一标识,所述第一标识用于关联所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载组成所述第一RLC承载对。The first configuration content includes the identifier and the first identifier of the first RLC bearer, the second configuration content includes the identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, and the first identifier is used for Associating the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一标识为所述第一无线承载的标识。The method according to claim 15, wherein the first identifier is an identifier of the first radio bearer.
  17. 根据权利要求14-16中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 14-16, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述宿主CU生成第二配置消息,所述第二配置消息用于配置所述第二节点和第一节点之间的所述第一无线链路控制RLC承载对;Generating, by the donor CU, a second configuration message, where the second configuration message is used to configure the first radio link control RLC bearer pair between the second node and the first node;
    所述宿主CU向所述第二节点发送所述第二配置消息。The host CU sends the second configuration message to the second node.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二配置消息中包含所述第一RLC承载的第三配置内容和所述第二RLC承载的第四配置内容,所述第三配置内容和所述第四配置内容满足如下任意一种方式:The method according to claim 17, wherein the second configuration message contains the third configuration content carried by the first RLC and the fourth configuration content carried by the second RLC, and the third configuration The content and the fourth configuration content satisfy any of the following methods:
    所述第三配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和所述第二RLC承载的标识,所述第四配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一RLC承载的标识;或者,The third configuration content includes the identity of the first RLC bearer and the identity of the second RLC bearer, and the fourth configuration content includes the identity of the second RLC bearer and the identity of the first RLC bearer. Logo; or,
    所述第三配置内容中包含所述第一RLC承载的标识和第一标识,所述第四配置内容中包含所述第二RLC承载的标识和所述第一标识,所述第一标识用于关联所述第一RLC承载和所述第二RLC承载组成所述第一RLC承载对。The third configuration content includes the identifier and the first identifier of the first RLC bearer, the fourth configuration content includes the identifier of the second RLC bearer and the first identifier, and the first identifier is used for Associating the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer to form the first RLC bearer pair.
  19. 根据权利要求14-18中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,完成所述第一RLC承载对的配置之后,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 14-18, wherein after completing the configuration of the first RLC bearer pair, the method further comprises:
    所述宿主CU向所述第一节点和所述第二节点发送第一通知消息,所述第一通知消息用于指示启用所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制,或者,所述第一通知消息用于指示取消所述第一RLC承载对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制和所述第二RLC承载各自对应的逻辑信道可用的服务小区的限制。The donor CU sends a first notification message to the first node and the second node, where the first notification message is used to indicate the restriction and all available serving cells of the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer. The second RLC bearer has the restriction on the serving cells available for the logical channel corresponding to each of the second RLC bearers, or the first notification message is used to instruct to cancel the restriction on the available serving cells for the logical channel corresponding to the first RLC bearer and the second RLC bearer. The RLC bears the limitation of the service cell available for the corresponding logical channel.
  20. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,所述处理器用于执行所述计算机程序或指令,使得权利要 求1至7中任一所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor is used to execute the computer program or instruction, so that claims 1 to 7. The method described in any one of 7.
  21. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,所述处理器用于执行所述计算机程序或指令,使得权利要求8至13中任一所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor is used to execute the computer program or instruction, so that claims 8 to 13. The method described in any one of 13.
  22. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序或指令,所述处理器用于执行所述计算机程序或指令,使得权利要求14至19中任一所述的方法。A communication device, characterized by comprising a processor, the processor is coupled with a memory, the memory is used to store a computer program or instruction, and the processor is used to execute the computer program or instruction, so that claims 14 to The method of any one of 19.
PCT/CN2020/080884 2019-03-28 2020-03-24 Radio link control (rlc) bearer configuration method and apparatus WO2020192654A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910245334.8A CN111757387B (en) 2019-03-28 2019-03-28 Method and device for configuring Radio Link Control (RLC) bearer
CN201910245334.8 2019-03-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020192654A1 true WO2020192654A1 (en) 2020-10-01

Family

ID=72609609

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/080884 WO2020192654A1 (en) 2019-03-28 2020-03-24 Radio link control (rlc) bearer configuration method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN111757387B (en)
WO (1) WO2020192654A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11483731B2 (en) * 2019-08-14 2022-10-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Configuration for packet forwarding on wireless backhaul
CN114499790A (en) * 2020-10-27 2022-05-13 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 Method and equipment used for wireless communication
WO2022151055A1 (en) * 2021-01-13 2022-07-21 Nec Corporation Methods, devices, and computer readable medium for communication

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103001748A (en) * 2012-12-25 2013-03-27 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Method and device for retransmitting data and processing retransmitted data
WO2016168967A1 (en) * 2015-04-20 2016-10-27 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for component carrier group configuration
CN109474956A (en) * 2017-09-07 2019-03-15 华为技术有限公司 Uplink data transmission method, timer configuration method and relevant device

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8392632B2 (en) * 2007-02-14 2013-03-05 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Method and apparatus for data processing in mobile communication system
US20080226074A1 (en) * 2007-03-15 2008-09-18 Interdigital Technology Corporation Method and apparatus for ciphering packet units in wireless communications
US10142799B2 (en) * 2014-08-19 2018-11-27 Qualcomm Incorporated Multicasting traffic using multi-connectivity
CN106470497B (en) * 2015-08-17 2019-10-29 中国移动通信集团公司 A kind of data transmission method, wireless spread-spectrum technology is sent and receiving entity
WO2018176231A1 (en) * 2017-03-28 2018-10-04 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Data transmission method and apparatus, data receiving method and apparatus, and electronic device
CN108401505B (en) * 2017-06-20 2021-10-15 北京小米移动软件有限公司 Function configuration method and device, message sending method and device and user equipment
ES2924196T3 (en) * 2017-06-20 2022-10-05 Beijing Xiaomi Mobile Software Co Ltd Method and device for disabling and enabling the packet replication function of the packet data convergence protocol
CN109842955B (en) * 2017-09-23 2023-11-21 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and device

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN103001748A (en) * 2012-12-25 2013-03-27 大唐移动通信设备有限公司 Method and device for retransmitting data and processing retransmitted data
WO2016168967A1 (en) * 2015-04-20 2016-10-27 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for component carrier group configuration
CN109474956A (en) * 2017-09-07 2019-03-15 华为技术有限公司 Uplink data transmission method, timer configuration method and relevant device

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
RWS-180010 WORKSHOP ON 3GPP SUBMISSION TOWARDS IMT-2020, 23 October 2018 (2018-10-23), pages 23 - 25, XP055744398 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111757387A (en) 2020-10-09
CN111757387B (en) 2022-02-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11800429B2 (en) Methods and systems for routing data through IAB nodes in 5G communication networks
WO2019214747A1 (en) Configuration method, data transmission method and apparatus
JP2021523638A (en) Information transmission method and equipment
KR102391106B1 (en) Nodes and Communication Methods
US10506644B2 (en) Radio access network device, data processing method, and IP packet processing method
WO2020192654A1 (en) Radio link control (rlc) bearer configuration method and apparatus
CN111586886B (en) Control method and device for wireless backhaul link
KR20220044328A (en) Routing method, BSR creation method, device and storage medium
US20230189091A1 (en) Iab node configuration method and communication apparatus
WO2022082679A1 (en) Communication method and related device
US20220225209A1 (en) Data packet transmission method and apparatus
WO2023011245A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
US20230388894A1 (en) Method and apparatus for packet rerouting
US20230044810A1 (en) Flow Control Method and Apparatus
US20230362779A1 (en) Communication method and related device
WO2020082948A1 (en) Data transmission method and device
WO2020042986A1 (en) Multi-hop data transmission method and apparatus
WO2021097678A1 (en) Access and backhaul control method and apparatus
WO2021026936A1 (en) Method and apparatus for processing link failure of backhaul link
RU2803196C1 (en) Data package transmission method and device
WO2022160288A1 (en) Wireless communication method and apparatus
WO2023246746A1 (en) Communication method and related device
WO2023011518A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
US20240073736A1 (en) Communication control method
WO2023130989A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20779947

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20779947

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1